1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5452 arg "newline-insert newline"
5458 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5490 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5499 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5500 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5501 describing some general features of all four of them.
5504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5511 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5520 reset the environment to
5524 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5525 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5526 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5530 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5534 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5543 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5545 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5546 you read all of section
5547 \begin_inset space ~
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5553 reference "sec:Nesting"
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5562 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5586 paragraph environment.
5587 It has the following properties:
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5595 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5604 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 The items can have any length.
5606 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5607 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5628 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 \begin_inset space ~
5641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5643 reference "sec:Nesting"
5647 for a full explanation of nesting.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5661 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5666 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the first level
5674 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The label for the second level is a dash.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 Back out to the third level.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 Back to the second level.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 Back to the outermost level.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 These are the default labels for an
5713 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5718 dialog in the submenu
5723 \begin_inset Index idx
5726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5732 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5737 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5739 \begin_inset space ~
5743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5745 reference "sec:Nesting"
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5766 name "sec:Enumerate"
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5778 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5779 It has these properties:
5782 \begin_layout Enumerate
5783 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5787 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5801 environment resets the counter to one.
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5819 Items can have any length.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5844 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5845 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 The first level of an
5857 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Back to the third level
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Back to the second level.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Back to the outermost level.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5900 environment, see section
5901 \begin_inset space ~
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5907 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5912 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 There is more to nesting
5920 environments than we've stated here.
5921 You should read section
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5928 reference "sec:Nesting"
5932 to learn more about nesting.
5935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_layout Standard
5950 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5954 list has no fixed label.
5955 Instead, LyX uses the first
5956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5963 of the first line as the label.
5967 \begin_layout Description
5968 Example: This is an example of the
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5989 it is meant that the first usage of the
5993 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5995 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6003 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6009 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6023 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6027 for more information.) Here is an example:
6030 \begin_layout Description
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6035 Example: This one shows how to use a
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Usage: You should use the
6055 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6056 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6058 It's not a good idea to use a
6062 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6063 You're better off using
6075 paragraphs into them.
6078 \begin_layout Description
6079 Nesting: You can nest
6083 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6089 them from the first line.
6092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6094 \begin_inset Index idx
6097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6111 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6114 \begin_layout Standard
6123 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6125 Here are its properties:
6128 \begin_layout Labeling
6129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 labels LyX uses the first
6135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6142 of each line as the item label.
6147 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6148 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6149 space as described above.
6152 \begin_layout Labeling
6153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6154 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6155 the body of the item text.
6156 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6157 label width plus a little extra space.
6161 \begin_layout Labeling
6162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6164 \begin_inset space ~
6167 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6169 If the label width is larger, the label
6170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6177 into the first line.
6178 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6179 margin of the rest of the item text.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6188 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6193 environment has the same left margin.
6194 \begin_inset Newline newline
6197 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6200 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6202 \begin_inset space ~
6207 dialog (toolbar button
6210 arg "layout-paragraph"
6217 \begin_inset space ~
6222 determines the default label width.
6223 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6232 multiple times instead.
6233 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6250 every time you alter a label in a
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 The predefined default width is the length of
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 list the same way as the
6282 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6288 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6298 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 to learn about nesting.
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is yet another feature of the
6318 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6320 You can use additional
6324 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6329 are documented in section
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6341 Here are some examples:
6344 \begin_layout Labeling
6345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 Left The default for
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6362 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6365 \begin_layout Labeling
6366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6378 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6381 \begin_layout Subsection
6383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6385 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6390 \begin_inset Index idx
6393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 The features described in this section require that the module
6405 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6407 is loaded in the document settings.
6408 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6413 \begin_inset Index idx
6416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6417 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 Custom Enumerate Lists
6427 \begin_inset Index idx
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6441 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6444 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6447 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6448 There you add the command
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 in TeX Code (shortcut
6470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6478 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6491 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6498 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6499 For capital Roman numerals replace
6511 in the command above.
6512 For Arabic numerals use
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 You can only number 26
6553 \begin_inset space ~
6556 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6564 \begin_layout Standard
6565 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6566 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6569 \begin_layout Standard
6570 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6573 \begin_layout Enumerate
6574 \begin_inset Argument 1
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Enumerate
6635 \begin_layout Enumerate
6636 \begin_inset Argument 1
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_inset Argument 1
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6694 For this list these commands were used:
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6708 \begin_inset Newline newline
6716 \begin_inset Newline newline
6724 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6741 makes the label emphasized and
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6760 lists until you change the definition.
6768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6770 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6786 \begin_layout Enumerate
6787 \begin_inset Argument 1
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_inset Note Note
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 goes back to default numbering
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6839 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6840 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6843 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6863 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6864 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6865 of a normal enumeration.
6866 There, insert the command
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6875 \begin_layout Standard
6880 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6893 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6897 \begin_inset Argument 1
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 This enumeration starts at 4
6919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6921 \begin_inset Index idx
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6936 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6944 with standard spacing
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6948 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6950 Add there the command
6954 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6957 \begin_layout Itemize
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7005 For more information see its documentation,
7006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7018 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7019 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7023 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 with negative indentation
7055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7056 Further Customization
7057 \begin_inset Index idx
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 Lists ! Customization
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7070 You can also change the style of description lists.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 changes the description label font, the command
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 sets the list style.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 An example where the command
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7103 itshape, style=nextline
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Description
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7116 \begin_inset Argument 1
7119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7127 itshape, style=nextline
7137 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7138 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7142 \begin_layout Description
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7147 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7148 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7149 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7153 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7169 For more information see its documentation
7170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7179 \begin_layout Subsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7198 Address: An Overview
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7216 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7217 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7218 In contrast, you can use the
7225 \begin_inset space ~
7230 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7231 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 Of course, you're not limited to using
7243 \begin_inset space ~
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7257 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7258 some European academic papers.
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7278 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7282 \begin_inset space ~
7287 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7288 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7289 Here's an example of each:
7292 \begin_layout Right Address
7294 \begin_inset Newline newline
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7305 When is it? What is today?
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7318 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7319 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7320 Here's an example of the
7327 \begin_layout Address
7329 \begin_inset Newline newline
7332 Where do I send this
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Your post office and country
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 As you can see, both
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7352 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7357 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7363 This makes sense, since
7371 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7372 Thus, you have to use
7379 arg "newline-insert newline"
7384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7396 ) to start a new line in an
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Subsection
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7417 or list of references.
7418 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7440 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7441 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7442 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7443 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7457 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7458 The book document classes ignores the
7462 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7466 in a letter document class.
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7474 environment does several things for you.
7475 First, it puts the centered label
7476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7484 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7486 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7487 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7488 the subsequent text.
7489 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7490 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7495 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7499 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7500 The new paragraph will still be in the
7505 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7506 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_inset Float figure
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset Graphics
7518 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7531 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 We would love to demonstrate the
7557 environment, but since this document is in the
7558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7565 class, we can't do this.
7566 We inserted it therefore as figure
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7578 If you have never heard of an
7579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7586 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7591 \begin_inset Index idx
7594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7603 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7615 environment is used to list references.
7616 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7617 only use it at the end of the document.
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7630 When you first open a
7634 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 depending on the document class.
7651 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7652 Each paragraph of the
7656 environment is a bibliography entry.
7661 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7662 Each new paragraph is still in the
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7671 by using a BibTeX database.
7672 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7673 phy handling, have a look at section
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7688 Special Environments
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7693 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is a LyX extension.
7725 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7730 key as a fixed whitespace.
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset space ~
7751 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7764 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7982 environment is similar to the
7986 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7987 computer console text.
7992 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8005 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8006 you can have empty lines.
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 have a certain language and a text style
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8028 \begin_layout Itemize
8029 contain the following characters (you will get LaTeX errors): µ ; ´ ; ³
8033 \begin_layout Standard
8034 Because of these properties
8038 works like a typewriter.
8042 \begin_layout Verbatim
8046 \begin_layout Verbatim
8049 The following 2 lines are empty:
8052 \begin_layout Verbatim
8056 \begin_layout Verbatim
8060 \begin_layout Verbatim
8061 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8066 \begin_layout Section
8067 Nesting Environments
8068 \begin_inset Index idx
8071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8072 Nesting ! Environments
8078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8087 \begin_layout Subsection
8091 \begin_layout Standard
8092 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8094 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8096 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8098 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8110 \begin_layout Enumerate
8114 \begin_layout Enumerate
8119 \begin_layout Enumerate
8123 \begin_layout Enumerate
8128 \begin_layout Enumerate
8132 \begin_layout Standard
8133 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8134 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8136 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8138 \begin_inset space ~
8142 \begin_inset space ~
8150 \begin_inset space ~
8154 \begin_inset space ~
8159 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8161 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8164 arg "depth-increment"
8170 arg "depth-decrement"
8184 arg "depth-increment"
8190 arg "depth-decrement"
8194 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8195 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8199 \begin_layout Standard
8200 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8201 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8202 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8203 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8206 \begin_layout Standard
8207 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8208 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8210 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8213 \begin_layout Subsection
8214 What You Can and Can't Nest
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8219 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8223 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8224 than a simple yes or no.
8225 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8228 \begin_layout Itemize
8229 Completely unnestable
8232 \begin_layout Itemize
8233 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8237 \begin_layout Itemize
8238 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8242 \begin_layout Standard
8243 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8244 environments have them:
8247 \begin_layout Description
8248 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8249 Can't nest into them.
8253 \begin_layout Itemize
8259 \begin_layout Itemize
8265 \begin_layout Itemize
8271 \begin_layout Itemize
8277 \begin_layout Itemize
8284 \begin_layout Description
8286 \begin_inset space ~
8289 Nestable You can nest them.
8290 You can nest other things into them.
8294 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 \begin_layout Itemize
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8312 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 \begin_layout Itemize
8336 \begin_layout Itemize
8343 \begin_layout Description
8344 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8345 You can't nest anything into them.
8349 \begin_layout Itemize
8355 \begin_layout Itemize
8361 \begin_layout Itemize
8367 \begin_layout Itemize
8373 \begin_layout Itemize
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8385 \begin_layout Itemize
8391 \begin_layout Itemize
8397 \begin_layout Itemize
8403 \begin_layout Itemize
8409 \begin_layout Itemize
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8431 \begin_inset space ~
8437 \begin_layout Itemize
8444 \begin_layout Standard
8445 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8453 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8466 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8467 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8468 nested section headings violate this.
8476 \begin_layout Subsection
8477 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8478 \begin_inset Index idx
8481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8482 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8490 \begin_layout Standard
8491 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8492 affected by nesting anyhow.
8496 \begin_layout Itemize
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8508 \begin_layout Standard
8510 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8518 Figures and tables in
8522 are not affected by this.
8527 Have a look at section
8528 \begin_inset space ~
8532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8534 reference "sec:Floats"
8538 for more information about
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8547 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8551 \begin_layout Standard
8552 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8560 of its own, it behaves just like a
8561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8568 paragraph environment.
8569 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8573 \begin_layout Standard
8574 Here's an example with a table:
8577 \begin_layout Enumerate
8582 \begin_layout Enumerate
8583 This is (a) and it's nested.
8587 \begin_layout Standard
8588 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8594 \begin_layout Standard
8596 \begin_inset Tabular
8597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8598 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8599 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8600 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8684 \begin_layout Standard
8685 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8692 \begin_layout Enumerate
8694 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8698 \begin_layout Enumerate
8702 \begin_layout Standard
8703 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8706 \begin_layout Enumerate
8711 \begin_layout Enumerate
8712 This is (a) and it's nested.
8716 \begin_layout Standard
8717 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8723 \begin_layout Standard
8725 \begin_inset Tabular
8726 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8727 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8728 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8729 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8813 \begin_layout Standard
8814 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8820 \begin_layout Enumerate
8827 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8830 \begin_layout Enumerate
8834 \begin_layout Standard
8835 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8839 \begin_layout Standard
8840 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8842 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8845 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 This is (a) and it's nested.
8854 \begin_layout Standard
8855 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8863 \begin_inset Tabular
8864 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8865 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8867 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 \begin_layout Standard
8953 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8959 \begin_layout Enumerate
8961 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8979 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8980 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8984 \begin_layout Subsection
8985 Usage and General Features
8988 \begin_layout Standard
8989 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8998 is the innermost possible depth.
8999 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9002 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 level #1 – outermost
9007 \begin_layout Enumerate
9012 \begin_layout Enumerate
9017 \begin_layout Enumerate
9022 \begin_layout Itemize
9027 \begin_layout Itemize
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9038 both of them in the example.
9039 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9049 For example, if we tried to nest another
9054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9061 , we would get errors.
9064 \begin_layout Subsection
9066 \begin_inset Index idx
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9078 \begin_layout Standard
9079 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9080 We have several examples of nested environments.
9081 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9086 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9089 \begin_layout Labeling
9090 \labelwidthstring MMM
9091 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9100 \begin_layout Labeling
9101 \labelwidthstring MMM
9102 #2-a This is level #2.
9103 We created it by using
9106 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9112 arg "depth-increment"
9119 \begin_layout Labeling
9120 \labelwidthstring MMM
9121 #3-a This is level #3.
9122 This time, we just enter
9129 arg "depth-increment"
9133 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9137 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9143 arg "depth-increment"
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9155 environment, nested inside of
9156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9164 So, it's at level #4.
9165 We did this by entering
9168 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9174 arg "depth-increment"
9177 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9182 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9198 \begin_layout Standard
9203 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9206 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9212 \begin_layout Labeling
9213 \labelwidthstring MMM
9214 #4-a This is level #4.
9218 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9221 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9226 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9230 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9235 keep nesting things inside
9236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9247 \begin_layout Labeling
9248 \labelwidthstring MMM
9249 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9254 \begin_layout Labeling
9255 \labelwidthstring MMM
9256 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9257 and this is level #6.
9258 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9262 \begin_layout Labeling
9263 \labelwidthstring MMM
9264 #5-b Back to level #5.
9268 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9274 arg "depth-decrement"
9281 \begin_layout Labeling
9282 \labelwidthstring MMM
9286 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9292 arg "depth-decrement"
9295 , we're back at level #4.
9299 \begin_layout Labeling
9300 \labelwidthstring MMM
9301 #3-b Back to level #3.
9302 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9306 \begin_layout Labeling
9307 \labelwidthstring MMM
9308 #2-b Back to level #2.
9313 \begin_layout Labeling
9314 \labelwidthstring MMM
9315 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9316 After this sentence, we will enter
9320 and change the paragraph environment back to
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 We could have also used the
9344 environment in place of the
9349 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9353 Example 2: Inheritance
9356 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9357 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9360 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9369 arg "depth-increment"
9373 \begin_inset Newline newline
9376 which, we will change to the
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9389 environment, at level #2.
9392 \begin_layout Enumerate
9393 Notice how the nested
9397 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9401 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9405 \begin_layout Standard
9406 We ended this example by entering
9411 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9415 and reset the nesting depth by using
9418 arg "depth-decrement"
9424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9425 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9434 \begin_inset Argument 1
9437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9438 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9446 \begin_layout Enumerate
9447 This is level #1, in an
9451 paragraph environment.
9452 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9456 \begin_layout Enumerate
9461 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9467 arg "depth-increment"
9471 Now, what happens if we nest an
9475 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9476 label be? An asterisk?
9480 \begin_layout Itemize
9490 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9491 So, its label is a bullet.
9492 (We got here by using
9495 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9501 arg "depth-increment"
9504 , then changing the environment to
9512 \begin_layout Itemize
9513 Here's level #4, produced using
9516 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9522 arg "depth-increment"
9526 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9531 \begin_layout Enumerate
9532 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9534 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9539 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9543 , because we are in the
9551 environment (that is, it is an
9566 \begin_layout Enumerate
9571 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9572 type of numbering does LyX use?
9575 \begin_layout Enumerate
9576 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9579 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9582 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9585 \begin_layout Enumerate
9589 arg "depth-decrement"
9592 to decrease the depth after the next
9595 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9602 \begin_layout Enumerate
9604 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9608 \begin_layout Enumerate
9610 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9611 numeral as the label.Why?
9614 \begin_layout Enumerate
9615 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9624 Notice, however, that LyX
9628 reset the counter for the label.
9632 \begin_layout Enumerate
9636 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9642 arg "depth-decrement"
9645 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9646 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9647 into the twofold-nested
9655 \begin_layout Enumerate
9656 The same thing happens if we do another
9659 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9665 arg "depth-decrement"
9668 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9671 \begin_layout Standard
9672 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9677 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9691 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9697 The same rule applies for the
9701 environment, as well.
9704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9705 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9709 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9710 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9711 the same detail with how we did it.
9720 \begin_layout Standard
9728 arg "depth-increment"
9735 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9736 the example in parentheses someplace.
9737 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9738 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9739 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9743 \begin_layout Enumerate
9748 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9753 Now we will add verse.
9754 \begin_inset Newline newline
9757 It will get much worse.
9758 \begin_inset Newline newline
9768 arg "depth-increment"
9779 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9780 \begin_inset Newline newline
9783 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9784 \begin_inset Newline newline
9790 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9803 \begin_layout Standard
9804 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9810 \begin_layout Standard
9812 \begin_inset Tabular
9813 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9814 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9815 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9905 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9915 arg "depth-increment"
9921 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9938 \begin_layout Enumerate
9943 : level #1) This is another item.
9944 Note that selecting a
9948 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9949 3 times to put the table inside the
9957 \begin_layout Quotation
9958 We're now ending the
9962 list and changing to
9967 We're still at level #1.
9968 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9969 The next set of paragraphs is a
9970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9977 We will nest both the
9984 \begin_inset space ~
9989 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9993 for the letter body.
9997 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
10000 to preserve the depth.
10001 Remember that you need to use
10004 arg "newline-insert newline"
10007 to create multiple lines inside the
10014 \begin_inset space ~
10024 \begin_layout Right Address
10026 \begin_inset Newline newline
10029 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10030 \begin_inset Newline newline
10036 \begin_layout Address
10038 \begin_inset space ~
10044 \begin_layout Quotation
10045 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10049 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10050 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10051 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10052 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10053 as soon as possible.
10054 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10057 \begin_layout Quotation
10058 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10059 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10060 with your order, along with payment.
10063 \begin_layout Quotation
10064 We thank you again for your patience.
10067 \begin_layout Address
10069 \begin_inset Newline newline
10076 \begin_layout Quotation
10077 That ends that example!
10080 \begin_layout Standard
10081 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10082 just a few keystrokes.
10083 We could have easily nested an
10104 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10107 \begin_layout Section
10108 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10109 \begin_inset Index idx
10112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10121 \begin_layout Standard
10122 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10123 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10124 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10125 be broken at the end of a line.
10126 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10130 \begin_layout Subsection
10132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10134 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10139 \begin_inset Index idx
10142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10151 \begin_layout Standard
10152 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10153 line at that point.
10154 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10157 \begin_layout Quote
10158 Further documentation is given in section
10159 \begin_inset Newline newline
10163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10165 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10173 \begin_layout Standard
10174 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10189 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10198 A protected space is set with
10200 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10201 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10203 \begin_inset space ~
10211 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10217 \begin_layout Subsection
10219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10221 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10226 \begin_inset Index idx
10229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10230 Spacing ! Horizontal
10238 \begin_layout Standard
10239 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10241 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10242 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10246 The length units are listed in Appendix
10247 \begin_inset space ~
10251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10253 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10264 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10269 \begin_inset Index idx
10272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10273 Spaces ! Inter-word
10281 \begin_layout Standard
10282 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10283 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10284 at the ends of sentences.
10285 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10286 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10287 followed by a period; see section
10288 \begin_inset space ~
10292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10294 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10299 To insert a normal space, select
10301 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10302 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10304 \begin_inset space ~
10312 arg "space-insert normal"
10318 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10322 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10327 \begin_inset Index idx
10330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10339 \begin_layout Standard
10341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10348 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10357 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10358 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10359 inside abbreviations:
10362 \begin_layout Quote
10364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10368 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10371 \begin_layout Standard
10372 or between values and units.
10373 Compare for example this:
10374 \begin_inset Newline newline
10378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10382 \begin_inset Newline newline
10385 10 kg (normal space
10388 \begin_layout Standard
10389 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10391 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10392 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10394 \begin_inset space ~
10402 arg "space-insert thin"
10408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10412 \begin_layout Standard
10413 You can also insert the following space types:
10416 \begin_layout Description
10418 \begin_inset space ~
10422 \begin_inset space ~
10425 space A line with a
10426 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10430 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10434 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10437 negative thin space between the arrows.
10440 \begin_layout Description
10442 \begin_inset space ~
10446 \begin_inset space ~
10449 space A line with a
10450 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10454 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10458 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10461 negative medium space between the arrows.
10464 \begin_layout Description
10466 \begin_inset space ~
10470 \begin_inset space ~
10473 space A line with a
10474 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10478 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10482 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10485 negative thick space between the arrows.
10488 \begin_layout Description
10490 \begin_inset space ~
10494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10498 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10502 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10506 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10510 \begin_inset space ~
10514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10517 em) space between the arrows.
10520 \begin_layout Description
10522 \begin_inset space ~
10526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10530 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10534 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10538 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10542 \begin_inset space ~
10546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10549 em) space between the arrows.
10552 \begin_layout Description
10554 \begin_inset space ~
10558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10562 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10566 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10570 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10574 \begin_inset space ~
10578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10581 em) space between the arrows.
10584 \begin_layout Description
10586 \begin_inset space ~
10590 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10594 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10599 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10606 cm space between the arrows.
10609 \begin_layout Standard
10611 \begin_inset space ~
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10617 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10621 lists the different space sizes.
10624 \begin_layout Standard
10625 \begin_inset Float table
10630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10631 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10636 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10640 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10650 \begin_inset Tabular
10651 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10652 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10653 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10654 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10770 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10929 \begin_inset Index idx
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10941 \begin_layout Standard
10942 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10943 in a uniform fashion.
10944 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10945 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10946 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10947 equally between themselves.
10950 \begin_layout Standard
10951 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10954 \begin_layout Quote
10956 This is on the left side
10957 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10960 This is on the right
10963 \begin_layout Quote
10966 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10970 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10976 \begin_layout Quote
10979 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10983 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10987 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10993 \begin_layout Standard
10994 That was an example in the
11000 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11004 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11008 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 is one in a standard paragraph.
11012 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11016 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Standard
11020 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11028 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11031 \begin_layout Standard
11033 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_layout Standard
11045 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11049 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_layout Standard
11057 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11069 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11073 \begin_inset space ~
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11091 \begin_layout Standard
11093 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11097 \begin_inset space ~
11103 \begin_layout Standard
11104 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11112 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11116 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11117 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11118 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11122 option in the space dialog.
11130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11134 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11139 \begin_inset Index idx
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11151 \begin_layout Standard
11152 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11153 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11156 \begin_layout Standard
11157 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11160 What is correct English?:
11161 \begin_inset Newline newline
11165 \begin_inset Newline newline
11169 \begin_inset space ~
11172 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11173 \begin_inset Newline newline
11177 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset Newline newline
11192 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11209 \begin_layout Standard
11211 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11216 \begin_inset space ~
11220 \begin_inset space ~
11224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11228 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11230 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11231 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11235 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11241 \begin_inset space ~
11245 \begin_inset space ~
11249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11252 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11261 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11262 That is why it is named
11263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11271 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11272 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11276 \begin_layout Subsection
11278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11280 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11285 \begin_inset Index idx
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 \begin_layout Standard
11298 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11300 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11301 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11303 \begin_inset space ~
11309 There you find the following sizes:
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11325 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11330 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11332 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11333 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11335 \begin_inset space ~
11341 \begin_inset Index idx
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11345 Document ! Settings
11350 for the paragraph separation.
11351 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11362 \begin_layout Standard
11368 \begin_inset Index idx
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11378 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11383 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11384 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11393 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11402 s are described in section
11403 \begin_inset space ~
11407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11409 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11418 If there are several
11422 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11423 You can therefore use
11427 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11430 \begin_layout Standard
11435 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11436 \begin_inset space ~
11440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11442 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11449 \begin_layout Standard
11450 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11460 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11461 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11473 \begin_layout Subsection
11474 Paragraph Alignment
11475 \begin_inset Index idx
11478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 Paragraph ! Alignment
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11488 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11490 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11493 dialog (toolbar button
11496 arg "layout-paragraph"
11500 There are five possibilities:
11503 \begin_layout Itemize
11511 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11517 \begin_layout Itemize
11525 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11531 \begin_layout Itemize
11539 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11545 \begin_layout Itemize
11553 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11559 \begin_layout Itemize
11567 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11575 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11576 the left and right margins.
11577 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11580 \begin_layout Standard
11582 This paragraph is right aligned,
11585 \begin_layout Standard
11587 this one is centered,
11590 \begin_layout Standard
11592 this one is left aligned.
11595 \begin_layout Subsection
11597 \begin_inset Index idx
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11601 Page breaks ! Forced
11607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11609 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11616 \begin_layout Standard
11617 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11618 can force a page break where you want one.
11619 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11620 Only if you use a lot of
11624 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11629 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11633 have to change the page breaking.
11636 \begin_layout Standard
11637 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11639 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11641 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11642 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11644 \begin_inset space ~
11650 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11652 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11653 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11655 \begin_inset space ~
11660 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11662 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11663 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11666 \begin_layout Standard
11667 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11668 at the top of a page.
11669 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11670 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11671 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11672 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11676 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11680 to learn more about
11687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11691 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11696 \begin_inset Index idx
11699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11700 Page breaks ! Clear
11708 \begin_layout Standard
11709 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11710 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11711 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11712 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11713 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11720 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11722 \begin_inset space ~
11728 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11730 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11731 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11733 \begin_inset space ~
11737 \begin_inset space ~
11742 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11743 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11746 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 \begin_inset Index idx
11751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11760 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11768 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11770 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11772 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11773 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11779 \begin_inset space ~
11787 arg "newline-insert newline"
11791 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11793 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11794 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11796 \begin_inset space ~
11800 \begin_inset space ~
11808 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11811 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11813 This is useful to avoid
11814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11821 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11824 \begin_layout Standard
11825 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11826 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11827 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11828 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11829 \begin_inset space ~
11833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11835 reference "sec:Quote"
11840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11842 reference "sec:Verse"
11847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11849 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11856 \begin_layout Subsection
11858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11860 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11865 \begin_inset Index idx
11868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11877 \begin_layout Standard
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11890 \begin_layout Standard
11894 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11895 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11897 \begin_inset space ~
11902 you can insert horizontal lines.
11903 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11904 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11905 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11908 \begin_layout Standard
11910 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11921 \begin_layout Section
11922 Characters and Symbols
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11926 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11927 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11928 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11936 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11940 for information on how this is done.
11943 \begin_layout Standard
11944 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11949 dialog via the menu
11951 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11952 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11958 \begin_layout Standard
11959 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11967 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11968 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11969 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11977 \begin_layout Section
11978 Fonts and Text Styles
11979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11981 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11988 \begin_layout Subsection
11990 \begin_inset Index idx
11993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12003 There are two types of fonts:
12006 \begin_layout Description
12008 \begin_inset space ~
12012 \begin_inset Index idx
12015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12021 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12026 characters) in the font.
12027 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12028 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12029 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12030 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12031 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12032 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12033 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12034 \begin_inset Newline newline
12037 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12038 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12039 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12040 sizes than at small ones.
12041 \begin_inset Newline newline
12055 \begin_inset space ~
12063 \begin_layout Description
12065 \begin_inset space ~
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12078 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12079 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12080 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12081 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12082 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12083 image manipulation program.
12084 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12085 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12086 \begin_inset space ~
12089 pixels high up to 34
12090 \begin_inset space ~
12093 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12094 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12095 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12097 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12098 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12099 \begin_inset Newline newline
12102 Bitmap fonts are named
12105 \begin_inset space ~
12110 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12115 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12116 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12117 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12118 use scalable fonts.
12121 \begin_layout Standard
12122 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12127 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12128 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12129 font to emphasize text, you use an
12130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12138 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12139 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12143 \begin_layout Subsection
12145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12147 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12154 \begin_layout Standard
12155 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12156 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12157 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12159 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12160 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12161 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12162 to a word processor.
12163 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12164 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12165 across different machines.
12166 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12167 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12169 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12171 \begin_inset space ~
12175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12177 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12182 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12183 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12187 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12188 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12190 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12191 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12192 that is installed on your system.
12193 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12196 \begin_layout Standard
12197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12205 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12206 es; so you might have to experiment.
12214 \begin_layout Standard
12215 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12224 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12232 \begin_layout Subsection
12233 Document Font and Font size
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "sub:Document-Font"
12241 \begin_inset Index idx
12244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12251 \begin_inset Index idx
12254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12263 \begin_layout Standard
12264 You can set the document fonts in the
12266 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12270 \begin_inset Index idx
12273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12274 Document ! Settings
12284 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12285 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12288 \begin_inset space ~
12297 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12299 \begin_inset space ~
12302 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12305 \begin_layout Standard
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12321 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12322 This requires that you use
12328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12367 as the output format, i.
12368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12372 \begin_inset space \space{}
12375 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12376 \begin_inset space ~
12380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12382 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12387 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12388 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12390 \begin_inset space ~
12393 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12394 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12395 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12397 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12406 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12411 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12412 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12419 \begin_inset space ~
12425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12438 European Computer Modern
12441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12448 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12451 \begin_layout Standard
12460 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12461 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12466 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12469 \begin_inset space ~
12474 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12480 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12481 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12484 \begin_layout Itemize
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12493 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12511 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12515 as the default font.
12516 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12517 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12520 \begin_inset space ~
12533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12534 One difference is improved kerning.
12542 \begin_layout Itemize
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12555 fonts in (the rare) case that
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12563 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12578 Virtual means that it
12579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12590 -glyphs from other fonts.
12591 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12613 Loading the LaTeX-package
12618 \begin_inset Index idx
12621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12622 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12627 with the document preamble line
12628 \begin_inset Newline newline
12635 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12636 \begin_inset Newline newline
12641 will fix the guillemet problem.
12646 and that accented characters are not
12650 glyph, but built of
12654 characters, the accent and the letter.
12655 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12661 If you search for example for the French word
12662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12669 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12678 and not for the glyph
12679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12683 \begin_inset space ~
12687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12693 \begin_layout Itemize
12694 If you do not like the look of
12702 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12707 \begin_inset space ~
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12723 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12724 \begin_inset space ~
12727 serif and typewriter fonts,
12731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12732 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12739 \begin_inset space ~
12748 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12753 \begin_inset space \space{}
12761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12765 \begin_inset space \space{}
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12779 \begin_inset space ~
12789 but you can also select your own.
12790 \begin_inset Newline newline
12793 The differences between roman,
12796 \begin_inset space ~
12805 fonts are explained in section
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12812 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12817 \begin_inset Newline newline
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12828 was originally designed for newspapers.
12829 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12830 into the small newspaper columns.
12834 \begin_inset space ~
12839 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12842 \begin_layout Standard
12843 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12856 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12861 depends on the class you are using.
12862 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12866 Note that the font size is the
12871 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12872 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12873 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12876 \begin_inset space ~
12882 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12889 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12896 \begin_layout Standard
12900 \begin_inset space ~
12905 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12910 serif or typewriter.
12915 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12925 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12928 \begin_layout Standard
12937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12946 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12952 \begin_inset Index idx
12955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12956 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12968 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12973 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12974 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12981 \begin_layout Standard
12982 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12984 Use Old Style Figures
12988 Use True Small Caps
12991 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12994 Use Old Style Figures
12996 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12998 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13006 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13010 Use True Small Caps
13012 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13013 of scaled capitals.
13014 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13015 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13018 \begin_layout Standard
13023 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13024 a font to display the script characters.
13028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13029 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13043 So this has no effect for the document language
13057 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13061 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13069 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13073 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13074 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13075 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13077 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13080 dialog, see section
13081 \begin_inset space ~
13085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13087 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13099 \begin_layout Subsection
13103 \begin_layout Standard
13104 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13106 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13107 choose a math font in the dialog
13109 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13113 \begin_inset Index idx
13116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13117 Document ! Settings
13123 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13124 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13125 default font family
13126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13142 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13143 the document font is available.
13146 \begin_layout Standard
13147 Note that the math font will not be used for
13151 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13157 or by the insertion of the command
13164 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13169 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13170 while the math characters do not.
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13175 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13186 \begin_inset space ~
13191 in the document font settings.
13194 \begin_layout Standard
13195 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13196 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13212 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13232 \begin_layout Subsection
13233 Using Different Character Styles
13234 \begin_inset Index idx
13237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13244 \begin_inset Index idx
13247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13256 \begin_layout Standard
13257 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13258 certain paragraph environments.
13259 LyX supports two character styles,
13268 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13272 \begin_layout Standard
13277 style, do one of the following:
13280 \begin_layout Itemize
13281 click on the toolbar button
13290 \begin_layout Itemize
13291 use the key binding
13300 \begin_layout Standard
13301 These commands are all toggles.
13306 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13309 \begin_layout Standard
13310 One typically uses the
13314 style for proper names.
13316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13323 is the original author of LyX.
13324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13330 \begin_layout Standard
13331 A more widely used character style is the
13336 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13343 \begin_layout Itemize
13344 clicking on the toolbar button
13353 \begin_layout Itemize
13354 using the keybindings
13363 \begin_layout Standard
13368 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13369 es use a different font.
13372 \begin_layout Standard
13373 We've been using the
13377 style all over the place in this document.
13378 Here's one more example:
13381 \begin_layout Quotation
13384 Do not overuse character styles!
13387 \begin_layout Standard
13388 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13389 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13390 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13391 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13395 \begin_layout Standard
13396 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13404 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13406 \begin_inset space ~
13409 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13415 arg "dialog-show character"
13421 \begin_layout Subsection
13422 Fine-Tuning with the
13427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13429 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13434 \begin_inset Index idx
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 \begin_layout Standard
13447 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13448 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13449 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13450 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13451 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13452 from ordinary dialog.
13455 \begin_layout Standard
13456 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13457 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13458 \begin_inset Newline newline
13461 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13462 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13465 \begin_layout Standard
13466 To use custom character styles, open the
13468 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13470 \begin_inset space ~
13473 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13476 dialog or press the toolbar button
13479 arg "dialog-show character"
13483 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13484 font property that you can choose.
13485 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13488 \begin_inset space ~
13493 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13498 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13499 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13500 environments all at once.
13503 \begin_layout Standard
13504 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13519 \begin_layout Labeling
13520 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13534 The possible options are:
13538 \begin_layout Labeling
13539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13544 This is the Roman font family.
13545 Normally a serif font.
13546 It's also the default family.
13556 \begin_layout Labeling
13557 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13561 \begin_inset space ~
13568 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13580 \begin_layout Labeling
13581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13588 This is the Typewriter font family.
13594 arg "font-typewriter"
13603 \begin_layout Labeling
13604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13609 This corresponds to the print weight.
13614 \begin_layout Labeling
13615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13620 This is the Medium font series.
13621 It's also the default series.
13624 \begin_layout Labeling
13625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13632 This is the Bold font series.
13645 \begin_layout Labeling
13646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13651 As the name implies.
13656 \begin_layout Labeling
13657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13662 This is the Upright font shape.
13663 It's also the default shape.
13666 \begin_layout Labeling
13667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13681 s the Italic font shape
13687 \begin_layout Labeling
13688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13695 This is the Slanted font shape
13697 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13700 \begin_layout Labeling
13701 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13705 \begin_inset space ~
13712 This is the Small caps font shape
13719 \begin_layout Labeling
13720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13725 Alters the text color.
13726 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13730 \begin_inset space ~
13735 , which means that the document default color set in
13737 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13738 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13744 \begin_inset space ~
13749 is used, you can choose between
13782 \begin_inset Index idx
13785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13794 \begin_layout Labeling
13795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13800 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13801 the language of the document.
13802 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13804 \begin_inset Newline newline
13807 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13808 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13809 When using the spell checking (see section
13810 \begin_inset space ~
13814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13816 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13820 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13823 \begin_layout Labeling
13824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13829 Alters the size of the font.
13830 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13831 proportional to the document font size.
13832 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13833 what you want to do.
13838 \begin_layout Labeling
13839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13860 arg "font-size tiny"
13866 \begin_layout Labeling
13867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13888 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13894 \begin_layout Labeling
13895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13916 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13922 \begin_layout Labeling
13923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13944 arg "font-size small"
13950 \begin_layout Labeling
13951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13965 It's also the default size.
13969 arg "font-size normal"
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13997 arg "font-size large"
14003 \begin_layout Labeling
14004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14025 arg "font-size larger"
14031 \begin_layout Labeling
14032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14053 arg "font-size largest"
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14081 arg "font-size huge"
14087 \begin_layout Labeling
14088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14109 arg "font-size giant"
14115 \begin_layout Labeling
14116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14141 arg "font-size increase"
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14173 arg "font-size decrease"
14180 \begin_layout Standard
14185 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14186 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14187 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14188 — use those instead.
14189 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14192 \begin_layout Labeling
14193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14198 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14203 \begin_layout Labeling
14204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14211 This is text with emphasize on
14214 This might seem like the same as
14218 , but it is actually a bit different.
14224 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14226 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14229 \begin_layout Labeling
14230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14237 This is text with Underbar on.
14243 arg "font-underline"
14249 \begin_inset Newline newline
14254 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14255 when you could not change fonts.
14256 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14257 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14261 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14264 \begin_layout Labeling
14265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14269 \begin_inset space ~
14276 This is text with Double underbar on.
14282 arg "font-underunderline"
14286 \begin_inset Newline newline
14289 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14290 about double underbar.
14293 \begin_layout Labeling
14294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14298 \begin_inset space ~
14305 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14311 arg "font-underwave"
14315 \begin_inset Newline newline
14318 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14319 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14322 \begin_layout Labeling
14323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 This is text with Strikeout on.
14336 arg "font-strikeout"
14340 \begin_inset Newline newline
14343 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14344 changed in the meantime.
14347 \begin_layout Labeling
14348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14355 This is text with Noun on.
14362 , this is a logical attribute.
14363 Normally it's equivalent to
14366 \begin_inset space ~
14375 \begin_layout Standard
14376 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14377 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14379 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14381 \begin_inset space ~
14384 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14390 arg "dialog-show character"
14393 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14394 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14397 arg "textstyle-apply"
14401 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14405 \begin_layout Standard
14406 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14413 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14414 (suppose you just set the shape to
14415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14445 \begin_layout Standard
14446 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14454 \begin_inset space ~
14466 \begin_layout Itemize
14472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14479 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14497 \begin_inset Newline newline
14501 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14515 \begin_inset Note Note
14518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14519 For more on phantoms see section
14520 \begin_inset space ~
14524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14526 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14536 \begin_inset Newline newline
14542 \begin_layout Itemize
14547 fonts use characters with serifs.
14548 These are the small
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14557 The following example shows the difference:
14558 \begin_inset Newline newline
14562 \begin_inset Newline newline
14567 text without serifs
14570 \begin_inset Newline newline
14573 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14574 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14581 \begin_layout Itemize
14586 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14587 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14588 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14591 \begin_layout Standard
14592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14599 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14600 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14603 \begin_inset space ~
14608 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14609 the property to be removed.
14610 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14611 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14612 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14630 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14631 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14639 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14643 \begin_inset space ~
14648 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14659 If you, for example, set
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14678 \begin_inset space ~
14683 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14692 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14695 \begin_layout Standard
14696 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14697 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14700 \begin_layout Section
14701 Printing and Previewing
14704 \begin_layout Subsection
14708 \begin_layout Standard
14709 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14710 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14711 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14712 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14713 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14715 Additional Features
14720 \begin_layout Standard
14721 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14722 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14723 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14724 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14725 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14726 This happens in two stages:
14729 \begin_layout Enumerate
14730 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14731 generating a file with the extension,
14732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14746 \begin_layout Enumerate
14747 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14751 file to produce printable output.
14754 \begin_layout Subsection
14755 Output file formats
14756 \begin_inset Index idx
14759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14768 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14776 Simple text (ASCII)
14777 \begin_inset Index idx
14780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14781 File formats ! ASCII
14789 \begin_layout Standard
14790 This file type has the extension
14791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14803 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14807 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14814 \begin_layout Standard
14815 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14817 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14818 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14820 \begin_inset space ~
14826 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14827 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14828 \begin_inset space ~
14832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14834 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14839 If your document includes such material, use
14841 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14842 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14844 \begin_inset space ~
14848 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_inset space ~
14860 \begin_inset space ~
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14870 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14871 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14876 \begin_inset Index idx
14879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14880 File formats ! LaTeX
14888 \begin_layout Standard
14889 This file type has the extension
14890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14901 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14903 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14904 it manually with console commands.
14905 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14906 you view or export your document.
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14910 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14912 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14913 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14928 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14929 \begin_inset space ~
14933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14935 reference "sub:Export"
14942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14944 \begin_inset Index idx
14947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14956 \begin_layout Standard
14957 This file type has the extension
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14978 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14979 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14980 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14984 \begin_layout Standard
14985 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14986 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14987 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14988 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14989 when you view the DVI.
14990 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14993 \begin_layout Standard
14994 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14996 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14997 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15002 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15003 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15022 The latter option uses the program
15031 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15032 font access (see section
15033 \begin_inset space ~
15037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15039 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15044 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15045 standard TeX processor.
15048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15050 \begin_inset Index idx
15053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15054 File formats ! PostScript
15062 \begin_layout Standard
15063 This file type has the extension
15064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 PostScript was developed by the company
15080 as a printer language.
15081 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15083 PostScript can be seen as a
15084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15087 programming language
15088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15091 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15096 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15102 \begin_inset Index idx
15105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15106 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15116 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15119 \begin_layout Standard
15120 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15124 Encapsulated PostScript
15125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15128 (EPS, file extension
15129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15141 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15142 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15143 If, for example, you have 50
15144 \begin_inset space ~
15147 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15151 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15152 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15153 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15154 EPS to avoid this problem.
15157 \begin_layout Standard
15158 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15160 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15161 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15169 \begin_inset Index idx
15172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15179 \begin_inset Index idx
15182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15191 \begin_layout Standard
15192 This file type has the extension
15193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15209 Portable Document Format
15210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15217 was derived from PostScript.
15218 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15227 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15228 looks exactly the same.
15231 \begin_layout Standard
15232 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15236 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15240 (JPG, file extension
15241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15268 Portable Network Graphics
15269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15272 (PNG, file extension
15273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15285 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15286 background to one of these formats.
15287 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15288 will slow down your workflow.
15289 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15292 \begin_layout Standard
15293 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15295 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15301 \begin_layout Description
15303 \begin_inset space ~
15306 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15310 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15313 \begin_layout Description
15315 \begin_inset space ~
15322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15329 X) This uses the program
15333 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15338 is a new engine, derived from
15342 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15343 access (see section
15344 \begin_inset space ~
15348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15350 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15355 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15356 standard TeX processor.
15359 \begin_layout Description
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15375 X) This uses the program
15379 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15384 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15385 font access (see section
15386 \begin_inset space ~
15390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15392 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15397 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15398 vertically written Japanese.
15401 \begin_layout Description
15403 \begin_inset space ~
15406 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15410 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15414 \begin_layout Description
15416 \begin_inset space ~
15419 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15423 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15424 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15428 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15429 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15432 \begin_layout Standard
15436 \begin_inset space ~
15445 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15446 works without problems.
15447 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15448 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15452 \begin_inset space ~
15459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15471 \begin_inset space ~
15478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15487 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15497 \begin_inset Index idx
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15501 FileFormats ! XHTML
15507 \begin_inset Index idx
15510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15519 \begin_layout Standard
15520 This file type has the extension
15521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15533 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15534 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15535 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15536 suitable for the purpose.
15537 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15539 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15540 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15543 between different formats, which are described in section
15545 Math Output in XHTML
15550 \begin_inset space ~
15558 \begin_layout Standard
15559 XHTML output remains
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15567 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15570 LyX and the World Wide Web
15574 Additional Features
15576 manual, for more information.
15579 \begin_layout Standard
15580 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15582 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15583 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15589 \begin_layout Subsection
15591 \begin_inset Index idx
15594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 \begin_layout Standard
15604 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15605 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15614 or use the toolbar button
15621 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15622 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15629 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15633 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15641 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15646 Further output formats can be selected via
15648 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15649 View (Other Formats)
15651 or the toolbar button
15652 \begin_inset Graphics
15653 filename ../images/view-others.png
15655 groupId toolbarbuttons
15662 \begin_layout Standard
15663 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15664 viewer window using the menu
15666 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15671 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15672 Update (Other Formats)
15677 \begin_layout Standard
15678 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15680 To have a real output, export your document.
15683 \begin_layout Subsection
15684 Printing the File from within LyX
15685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15687 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15694 \begin_layout Standard
15695 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15696 it directly from within LyX.
15697 To print a file, select the menu
15699 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15705 arg "dialog-show print"
15708 ) or click on the toolbar button
15711 arg "dialog-show print"
15715 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15716 This file is then processed by the program
15720 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15725 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15728 \begin_layout Standard
15729 You can set the following print parameters in the
15732 \begin_inset space ~
15740 \begin_layout Labeling
15741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15746 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15751 Note that this printer name is for the program
15760 has to be configured for this printer name.
15761 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15762 \begin_inset space ~
15766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15768 reference "sub:Printer"
15777 The printer should understand PostScript.
15780 \begin_layout Labeling
15781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15786 The name of a file to print to.
15787 The output will be a PostScript file.
15788 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15792 \begin_layout Standard
15793 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15794 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15795 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15796 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15797 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15798 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15799 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15802 \begin_layout Section
15803 A few Words about Typography
15804 \begin_inset Index idx
15807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15816 \begin_layout Subsection
15817 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15818 \begin_inset Index idx
15821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15828 \begin_inset Index idx
15831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15840 \begin_layout Standard
15842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15853 character comes in four lengths: the
15865 , and the minus sign:
15866 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15872 \begin_layout Standard
15873 \begin_inset Tabular
15874 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15875 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15876 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15877 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15878 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15879 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15908 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15948 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15973 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15975 \begin_inset space ~
15978 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15985 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16010 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16012 \begin_inset space ~
16015 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16036 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16070 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16076 \begin_layout Standard
16077 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16089 character multiple times in a row.
16090 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16091 the final output, but not in LyX.
16093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16123 \begin_layout Standard
16124 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16125 math mode and has a length of its own.
16126 Here are some examples:
16129 \begin_layout Enumerate
16130 line- and page-breaks
16131 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16141 \begin_layout Enumerate
16143 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16153 \begin_layout Enumerate
16154 Oh — there's a dash.
16155 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16165 \begin_layout Enumerate
16166 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16170 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16180 \begin_layout Subsection
16182 \begin_inset Index idx
16185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16194 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16201 \begin_layout Standard
16202 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16203 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16208 \begin_inset Index idx
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16212 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16217 following the rules of the document language.
16220 \begin_layout Standard
16221 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16226 font and with unusual constructs, like
16227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16235 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16237 This is done with the menu
16239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16240 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16242 \begin_inset space ~
16248 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16249 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16252 \begin_layout Standard
16253 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16254 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16264 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16272 as a hyphenation possibility.
16273 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16274 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16275 as described in section
16276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16279 Prevent Hyphenation
16280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 \begin_inset space ~
16294 \begin_layout Subsection
16296 \begin_inset Index idx
16299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16309 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16312 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16319 \begin_layout Standard
16320 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16321 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16322 LaTeX then adds the
16323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16326 appropriate amount of space.
16327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16330 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16332 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16333 gets after another word.
16336 \begin_layout Standard
16337 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16338 not work in all cases.
16340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16351 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16352 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16355 \begin_layout Standard
16356 Here are some examples of
16360 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16363 \begin_layout Itemize
16368 \begin_layout Itemize
16373 \begin_layout Standard
16374 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16377 \begin_layout Itemize
16379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16383 this is too much space!
16386 \begin_layout Itemize
16391 \begin_layout Standard
16392 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16395 \begin_layout Standard
16396 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16399 \begin_layout Enumerate
16403 \begin_inset space ~
16408 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16409 \begin_inset space ~
16413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16415 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16420 \begin_inset Index idx
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 Spaces ! inter-word
16432 \begin_layout Enumerate
16436 \begin_inset space ~
16441 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16442 \begin_inset space ~
16446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16448 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16453 \begin_inset Index idx
16456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16465 \begin_layout Enumerate
16469 \begin_inset space ~
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16477 \begin_inset space ~
16484 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16486 \begin_inset space ~
16491 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16492 This function is also bound to
16495 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16501 \begin_layout Standard
16502 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16505 \begin_layout Itemize
16507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16511 \begin_inset space \space{}
16514 this is too much space!
16517 \begin_layout Itemize
16518 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16522 \begin_layout Standard
16523 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16524 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16525 will take care of this.
16528 \begin_layout Standard
16529 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16538 feature described in the section
16544 Additional Features
16549 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16551 \begin_inset Index idx
16554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16555 Typography ! Quotes
16561 \begin_inset Index idx
16564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16596 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16597 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16598 and use a closing quote at the end.
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16608 The keyboard character,
16612 , generates this automatically.
16615 \begin_layout Standard
16616 You can specify what character the
16620 key produces using the submenu
16626 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16630 \begin_inset Index idx
16633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16634 Document ! Settings
16644 There are six choices:
16647 \begin_layout Labeling
16648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16671 \begin_layout Labeling
16672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16675 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16679 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16685 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16689 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16695 \begin_layout Labeling
16696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16699 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16703 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16709 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16713 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16719 \begin_layout Labeling
16720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16723 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16727 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16733 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16737 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16743 \begin_layout Labeling
16744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16747 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16751 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16757 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16761 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16767 \begin_layout Labeling
16768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16771 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16775 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16781 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16785 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16791 \begin_layout Standard
16792 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16795 arg "quote-insert single"
16801 \begin_layout Subsection
16803 \begin_inset Index idx
16806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16807 Typography ! Ligatures
16813 \begin_inset Index idx
16816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16847 name "sub:Ligatures"
16854 \begin_layout Standard
16855 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16856 print them as single characters.
16857 These groups are known as
16862 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16864 Here are the standard ligatures:
16867 \begin_layout Itemize
16871 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_layout Itemize
16879 \begin_layout Itemize
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16887 \begin_layout Standard
16888 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16893 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16901 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16917 To break a ligature, use
16919 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16920 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16922 \begin_inset space ~
16929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16940 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16957 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16965 \begin_layout Subsection
16967 \begin_inset Index idx
16970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16979 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16986 \begin_layout Standard
16987 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16988 characters in different sizes and positions.
16989 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16990 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17010 \begin_inset Note Note
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17014 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17015 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17020 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17021 following proper names:
17024 \begin_layout Description
17025 LyX The name of the game, write
17026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17047 \begin_layout Description
17048 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17070 \begin_layout Description
17071 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17093 \begin_layout Description
17094 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17116 \begin_layout Standard
17117 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17122 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17130 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17131 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17132 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17135 : The actual version is
17136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17143 , the previous one was
17144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17154 \begin_layout Standard
17155 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17156 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17157 In LyX this will look like
17158 \begin_inset Graphics
17159 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17165 \begin_inset Newline newline
17168 For more about TeX Code, see section
17169 \begin_inset space ~
17173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17175 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17182 \begin_layout Subsection
17184 \begin_inset Index idx
17187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Standard
17197 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17198 space between two words.
17199 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17209 for units use the menu
17211 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17212 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17214 \begin_inset space ~
17222 arg "space-insert thin"
17228 \begin_layout Standard
17229 Here is an example to show the differences:
17232 \begin_layout Standard
17233 \begin_inset Tabular
17234 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17235 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17236 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17244 \begin_inset space ~
17248 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17260 space between number and unit
17267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17276 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17288 half space between number and unit
17301 \begin_layout Subsection
17303 \begin_inset Index idx
17306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17307 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17315 \begin_layout Standard
17316 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17318 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17319 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17320 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17321 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17322 These bits of text became known as
17333 \begin_layout Standard
17334 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17335 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17336 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17337 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17338 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17339 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17340 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17341 \begin_inset Newline newline
17349 \begin_inset Newline newline
17357 \begin_inset Newline newline
17360 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17361 Some LaTeX books (such as
17362 \begin_inset space ~
17366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17368 key "latexcompanion"
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17383 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17387 \begin_layout Chapter
17388 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17391 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17398 \begin_layout Standard
17399 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17408 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17411 \begin_layout Section
17413 \begin_inset Index idx
17416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17432 \begin_layout Standard
17433 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17436 \begin_layout Description
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17441 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17442 \begin_inset Newline newline
17446 \begin_inset Note Note
17449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17450 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17458 \begin_layout Description
17459 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17460 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17462 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17463 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17476 \begin_inset space ~
17482 \begin_inset Newline newline
17486 \begin_inset Note Comment
17489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17490 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17498 \begin_layout Description
17500 \begin_inset space ~
17503 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17504 set in the document settings under
17506 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17508 \begin_inset space ~
17514 \begin_inset Newline newline
17518 \begin_inset Newline newline
17522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17531 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17532 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17537 of a comment that appears in the output.
17543 \begin_inset Newline newline
17547 \begin_inset Newline newline
17550 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17553 \begin_layout Standard
17554 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17562 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17566 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17569 \begin_layout Section
17571 \begin_inset Index idx
17574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17583 name "sec:Footnotes"
17590 \begin_layout Standard
17591 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17594 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17597 or the toolbar button
17600 arg "footnote-insert"
17612 \begin_inset Graphics
17613 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17622 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17651 label, the box will
17655 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17656 Clicking on the box label again will close
17669 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17670 and click on the footnote
17685 \begin_layout Standard
17686 Here is an example footnote:
17694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17695 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17703 \begin_layout Standard
17704 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17705 position where the footnote box is placed.
17706 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17707 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17708 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17709 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17714 ey are described in the
17717 \begin_inset space ~
17725 \begin_layout Section
17727 \begin_inset Index idx
17730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17739 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17746 \begin_layout Standard
17747 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17748 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17750 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17752 \begin_inset space ~
17757 or the toolbar button
17760 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17786 appearing within your text.
17787 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17796 \begin_layout Standard
17797 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17801 \begin_inset Marginal
17804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 This is a marginal note.
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17816 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17817 pages, right on odd pages.
17820 \begin_layout Standard
17821 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17824 \begin_inset space ~
17832 \begin_inset space ~
17840 \begin_layout Section
17841 Graphics and Images
17842 \begin_inset Index idx
17845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17852 \begin_inset Index idx
17855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17864 name "sec:Graphics"
17871 \begin_layout Standard
17872 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17873 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17876 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17885 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17888 \begin_layout Standard
17889 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17894 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17895 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17897 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17898 \begin_inset space ~
17902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17904 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17916 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17917 of the image in the output.
17918 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17922 \begin_inset space ~
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17935 \begin_inset space ~
17939 \begin_inset space ~
17943 \begin_inset space ~
17948 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17949 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17957 \begin_layout Standard
17964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17972 \begin_inset space ~
17976 \begin_inset space ~
17983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17992 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17993 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17997 \begin_inset space ~
18002 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18003 with the image size is printed.
18007 \begin_inset space ~
18011 \begin_inset space ~
18015 \begin_inset space ~
18020 is explained in the
18023 \begin_inset space ~
18035 \begin_layout Standard
18036 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18037 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18039 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18042 \begin_layout Standard
18044 \begin_inset Graphics
18045 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18053 \begin_layout Standard
18054 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18055 the image into a float, see section
18056 \begin_inset space ~
18060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18062 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18069 \begin_layout Subsection
18071 \begin_inset Index idx
18074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18083 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18090 \begin_layout Standard
18091 You can insert images in any known file format.
18092 But as we explained in section
18093 \begin_inset space ~
18097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18099 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18103 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18104 LyX therefore uses the program
18108 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18109 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18110 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18111 \begin_inset space ~
18115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18117 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18128 \begin_layout Description
18130 \begin_inset space ~
18133 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18134 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18135 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18139 Graphics Interchange Format
18140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18143 (GIF, file extension
18144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18156 \begin_inset Index idx
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18191 Portable Network Graphics
18192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18195 (PNG, file extension
18196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18208 \begin_inset Index idx
18211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18243 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18247 (JPG, file extension
18248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18272 \begin_inset Index idx
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18306 \begin_layout Description
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18311 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18313 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18314 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18315 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18316 \begin_inset Newline newline
18319 Scalable image formats can be
18320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18323 Scalable Vector Graphics
18324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18327 (SVG, file extension
18328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18340 \begin_inset Index idx
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18375 Encapsulated PostScript
18376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18379 (EPS, file extension
18380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18392 \begin_inset Index idx
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18427 Portable Document Format
18428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18431 (PDF, file extension
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18444 \begin_inset Index idx
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18462 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18463 result will not be scalable.
18464 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18470 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18478 \begin_layout Standard
18479 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18486 \begin_layout Subsection
18487 Grouping of Image Settings
18488 \begin_inset Index idx
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18492 Images ! Settings grouping
18500 \begin_layout Standard
18501 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18503 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18504 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18506 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18507 need to manually change each of them.
18511 \begin_layout Standard
18512 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18515 \begin_inset space ~
18519 \begin_inset space ~
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18542 \begin_inset space ~
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18564 and checking the name of the desired group.
18567 \begin_layout Section
18569 \begin_inset Index idx
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18588 \begin_layout Standard
18589 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18592 arg "tabular-insert"
18597 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18601 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18602 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18603 from the rest of the table.
18604 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18605 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18607 Here is an example table:
18610 \begin_layout Standard
18612 \begin_inset Tabular
18613 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18614 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18617 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18618 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 \begin_layout Subsection
18822 \begin_layout Standard
18823 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18826 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18830 This brings up the table dialog.
18831 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18832 cursor is placed currently.
18833 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18834 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18835 done on all of your selection.
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 In addition to the table dialog, the
18842 \begin_inset space ~
18847 helps you in setting table properties.
18848 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18851 \begin_layout Standard
18855 \begin_inset space ~
18860 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18861 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18862 current cell respectively.
18863 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18865 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18866 of text, see section
18867 \begin_inset space ~
18871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18873 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18880 \begin_layout Standard
18881 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18882 using the check box
18891 This will merge the cells to
18895 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18896 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18897 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18898 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18899 in the last row without the upper border:
18902 \begin_layout Standard
18904 \begin_inset Tabular
18905 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18906 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18908 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18921 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19041 \begin_layout Standard
19042 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19043 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19044 explained in the chapter
19051 \begin_inset space ~
19057 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19061 degrees counterclockwise.
19062 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19065 \begin_layout Standard
19066 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 Most DVI-viewers are
19078 able to display rotations.
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19091 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19096 adds lines for all cell borders.
19099 \begin_layout Subsection
19101 \begin_inset Index idx
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19105 Tables ! Longtables
19111 \begin_inset Index idx
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 \begin_layout Standard
19124 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19127 \begin_inset space ~
19131 \begin_inset space ~
19140 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19141 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19144 \begin_layout Description
19149 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19150 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19151 except for the first page, if
19154 \begin_inset space ~
19162 \begin_layout Description
19166 \begin_inset space ~
19171 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19172 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19175 \begin_layout Description
19180 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19181 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19182 except for the last page, if
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_layout Description
19197 \begin_inset space ~
19202 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19203 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19206 \begin_layout Description
19207 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19208 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19210 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19214 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19217 \begin_inset space ~
19225 \begin_layout Standard
19226 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19227 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19228 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19234 In this context, first means first in this order:
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19254 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19259 \begin_inset Tabular
19260 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19261 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19262 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19264 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19265 <row endfirsthead="true">
19266 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19272 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19277 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 <row endfirsthead="true">
19297 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19329 <row endhead="true">
19330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <row endhead="true">
19361 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <row endfoot="true">
19394 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19445 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20404 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <row endlastfoot="true">
21376 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21387 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 \begin_layout Subsection
21415 \begin_inset Index idx
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21427 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21434 \begin_layout Standard
21435 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21436 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21437 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21438 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21442 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21445 \begin_layout Standard
21446 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21447 for the column in the table dialog.
21448 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21449 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21453 \begin_layout Standard
21455 \begin_inset Tabular
21456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21457 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21459 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21460 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 This is longer now.
21610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21661 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21662 This is longer now.
21667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 \begin_layout Standard
21694 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21695 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21701 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21707 Selection with the mouse or with
21711 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21712 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21713 the selection from outside the table.
21716 \begin_layout Section
21718 \begin_inset Index idx
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21737 \begin_layout Subsection
21741 \begin_layout Standard
21742 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21743 have a fixed location.
21745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21752 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21760 \begin_inset space ~
21765 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21766 too many notes on the current page.
21769 \begin_layout Standard
21770 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21771 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21772 and pages without text.
21773 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21774 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21775 Floats are therefore numbered.
21776 Referencing is described in section
21777 \begin_inset space ~
21781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21783 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21790 \begin_layout Standard
21791 To insert a float, use the menu
21793 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21797 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21798 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21800 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21801 \begin_inset Index idx
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21811 paragraph within the float.
21812 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21813 by left-clicking on the box label.
21814 A closed float box looks like this:
21815 \begin_inset Graphics
21816 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21821 – a gray button with a red label.
21824 \begin_layout Standard
21825 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21826 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21829 \begin_layout Subsection
21831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21833 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21838 \begin_inset Index idx
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 Floats ! Figure floats
21850 \begin_layout Standard
21852 \begin_inset space ~
21856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21858 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21862 was created using the menu
21864 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21865 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21871 arg "float-insert figure"
21875 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21878 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21884 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21888 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21889 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21891 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21893 \begin_inset space ~
21901 arg "layout-paragraph"
21907 \begin_layout Standard
21908 \begin_inset Float figure
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 \begin_inset Graphics
21916 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21926 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21931 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21935 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21948 \begin_layout Standard
21949 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21950 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21952 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21961 ) and refer to it using the menu
21963 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21969 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21973 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21974 vague references like
21975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21982 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21992 For more about cross-references, see section
21993 \begin_inset space ~
21997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21999 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22006 \begin_layout Standard
22007 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22008 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22009 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22010 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22011 as described in section
22012 \begin_inset space ~
22016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22018 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22024 \begin_inset space ~
22028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22030 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22034 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22035 You can also set the images one below the other.
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22043 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22050 reference "fig:Platypus"
22054 are the subfigures.
22057 \begin_layout Standard
22058 \begin_inset Float figure
22063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22068 \begin_inset Float figure
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22079 name "fig:Undefinable"
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 \begin_inset Graphics
22093 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22104 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22108 \begin_inset Float figure
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22119 name "fig:Platypus"
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 \begin_inset Graphics
22133 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22145 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22157 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22161 Two distorted images.
22174 \begin_layout Subsection
22176 \begin_inset Index idx
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 Floats ! Table floats
22188 \begin_layout Standard
22189 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22191 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22192 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22195 or the toolbar button
22198 arg "float-insert table"
22202 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22203 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22204 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22206 \begin_inset space ~
22210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22212 reference "tab:Table-float"
22219 \begin_layout Standard
22220 \begin_inset Float table
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22231 name "tab:Table-float"
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 \begin_inset Tabular
22246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22247 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22401 \end{array}\right]$
22409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22443 \begin_layout Subsection
22445 \begin_inset Index idx
22448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 \begin_layout Standard
22458 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22459 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22460 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22462 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22470 \begin_inset space ~
22478 \begin_layout Section
22480 \begin_inset Index idx
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 \begin_layout Standard
22493 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22495 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22496 \begin_inset space \space{}
22503 \begin_layout Standard
22504 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22506 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22510 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22511 and its alignment within the page.
22514 \begin_layout Standard
22516 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22526 height_special "totalheight"
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22532 This is a minipage.
22533 The text is set in an italic style.
22536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22540 another formatting.
22548 \begin_layout Standard
22549 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22552 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22556 as described in section
22557 \begin_inset space ~
22561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22563 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22568 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22574 \begin_layout Standard
22575 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22585 height_special "totalheight"
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22590 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22600 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22610 height_special "totalheight"
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22615 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22623 \begin_layout Standard
22624 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22630 \begin_layout Standard
22631 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22633 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22640 \begin_inset space ~
22648 \begin_layout Chapter
22649 Mathematical Formulas
22650 \begin_inset Index idx
22653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22660 \begin_inset Index idx
22663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22694 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22701 \begin_layout Standard
22702 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22707 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22710 \begin_layout Section
22712 \begin_inset Index idx
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22724 \begin_layout Standard
22725 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22738 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22740 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22741 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22742 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22744 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22750 \begin_layout Standard
22751 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22755 \begin_inset space ~
22760 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22763 \begin_layout Standard
22764 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22765 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22768 \begin_layout Standard
22769 This is a line with an inline formula
22770 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22776 \begin_layout Standard
22777 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22778 paragraph, like this one:
22779 \begin_inset Formula
22786 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22789 \begin_layout Standard
22790 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22791 For example, typing
22792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22805 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22806 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22810 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22813 \begin_inset space ~
22821 \begin_layout Subsection
22822 Navigating in Formulas
22823 \begin_inset Index idx
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22835 \begin_layout Standard
22836 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22837 achieved with the arrow keys.
22838 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22839 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22844 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22845 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22849 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22853 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22856 \end{array}\right]$
22864 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22869 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22870 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22873 \begin_layout Standard
22878 , printed in this document as
22879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22883 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22890 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22891 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22892 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22897 For example, if you want
22898 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22906 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22916 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22920 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22925 , since in the latter case only the
22928 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22933 will be under the square root sign:
22934 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22940 \begin_layout Standard
22941 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22943 \begin_inset Formula
22945 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22954 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22955 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22958 \begin_layout Subsection
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22963 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22964 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22968 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22969 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22970 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22971 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22972 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22975 \begin_layout Subsection
22976 Exponents and Subscripts
22977 \begin_inset Index idx
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22987 \begin_inset Index idx
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 \begin_layout Standard
23000 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23003 arg "math-superscript"
23009 arg "math-subscript"
23012 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23014 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23017 , type in a formula
23020 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23030 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23036 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23040 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23046 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23052 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23061 , you have to use an extra
23065 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23066 For example, if you want
23067 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23073 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23079 Subscripts are similar: To get
23080 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23086 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23094 \begin_layout Subsection
23096 \begin_inset Index idx
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 Create a fraction either with the command
23115 or by using the icon
23118 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23124 \begin_inset space ~
23130 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23131 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23132 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23137 To move back up, press
23142 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23143 \begin_inset Formula
23145 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23148 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23156 \begin_layout Subsection
23158 \begin_inset Index idx
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 \begin_layout Standard
23171 Roots can be created using the
23174 \begin_inset space ~
23182 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23188 arg "math-insert \\root"
23210 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23216 always produces a square root.
23219 \begin_layout Subsection
23220 Operators with Limits
23221 \begin_inset Index idx
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 \begin_inset Index idx
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23243 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23250 \begin_layout Standard
23252 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23256 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23259 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23260 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23261 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23262 The sum operator will automatically place its
23263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23270 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23272 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23276 \begin_inset Formula
23278 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23283 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23287 \begin_layout Standard
23288 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23290 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23291 behind the operator and using the menu
23293 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23294 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23296 \begin_inset space ~
23300 \begin_inset space ~
23314 \begin_layout Standard
23315 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23324 \begin_inset Index idx
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 \begin_inset Formula
23336 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23341 which will place the
23342 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23354 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23355 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23361 \begin_layout Standard
23362 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23369 Have a look at section
23370 \begin_inset space ~
23374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23376 reference "sub:Functions"
23380 for an explanation of function macros.
23383 \begin_layout Subsection
23385 \begin_inset Index idx
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 \begin_layout Standard
23398 Most math symbols can be found in the
23401 \begin_inset space ~
23406 under one of several categories; including
23423 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23427 \begin_layout Standard
23428 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23429 you don't have to use the
23432 \begin_inset space ~
23437 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23438 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23441 \begin_layout Subsection
23443 \begin_inset Index idx
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 \begin_layout Standard
23456 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23461 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23467 \begin_inset space ~
23475 arg "math-insert \\space"
23479 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23480 For example, the sequence
23485 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23489 \begin_inset Graphics
23490 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23495 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23496 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23497 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23498 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23500 Here are two examples:
23503 \begin_layout Standard
23513 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23519 \begin_layout Standard
23529 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23535 \begin_layout Subsection
23537 \begin_inset Index idx
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23549 name "sub:Functions"
23556 \begin_layout Standard
23560 \begin_inset space ~
23565 contains under the button
23568 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23571 a number of function macros, such as
23572 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23576 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23584 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23591 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23592 avoid confusions, because
23593 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23597 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23603 \begin_layout Standard
23604 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23606 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23610 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23617 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23618 are placed, as described in section
23619 \begin_inset space ~
23623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23625 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23632 \begin_layout Subsection
23634 \begin_inset Index idx
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 \begin_layout Standard
23647 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23649 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23650 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23651 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23654 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23655 Our example is entered by typing
23660 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23667 \begin_inset space ~
23671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23673 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23677 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23680 \begin_layout Standard
23681 \begin_inset Float table
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23687 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23692 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23696 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 \begin_inset Tabular
23707 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23708 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23709 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24011 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24293 \begin_layout Standard
24294 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24297 \begin_inset space ~
24305 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24308 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24312 \begin_layout Section
24313 Brackets and Delimiters
24314 \begin_inset Index idx
24317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 \begin_inset Index idx
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24336 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24343 \begin_layout Standard
24344 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24345 For some purposes, using just the keys
24350 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24351 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24352 toolbar delimiter icon
24355 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24359 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24360 \begin_inset Formula
24362 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24370 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24371 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24375 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24378 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24384 \begin_inset Formula
24386 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24394 \begin_layout Standard
24395 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24396 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24400 \begin_layout Standard
24401 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24402 left side and right side.
24403 If you use the option
24406 \begin_inset space ~
24411 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24412 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24413 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24418 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24421 \begin_layout Standard
24422 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24423 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24424 is to go inside the brackets.
24425 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24430 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24431 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24432 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24436 arg "math-delim ( )"
24442 \begin_layout Section
24443 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24444 \begin_inset Index idx
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24454 \begin_inset Index idx
24457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 \begin_inset Index idx
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24476 \begin_layout Standard
24477 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24480 \begin_inset space ~
24488 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24492 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24493 Here is an example:
24494 \begin_inset Formula
24496 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24505 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24506 \begin_inset space ~
24510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24512 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24517 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24518 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24519 This alignment is set in the box
24524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24572 for every column as default.
24573 For example, the sequence
24574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24585 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24586 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24587 corresponds to the relevant column.
24588 The result will look like this:
24589 \begin_inset Formula
24592 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24593 column & has & has\, right\\
24594 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24603 \begin_layout Standard
24604 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24607 arg "newline-insert newline"
24610 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24611 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24613 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24616 or the math toolbar.
24619 \begin_layout Standard
24620 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24621 It can be created with the menu
24623 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24624 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24626 \begin_inset space ~
24638 Here is an example:
24639 \begin_inset Formula
24653 \begin_layout Standard
24654 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24657 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24660 arg "newline-insert newline"
24664 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24669 arg "newline-insert newline"
24672 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24680 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24681 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24682 A new row is created by every further entry of
24685 arg "newline-insert newline"
24689 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24690 Here is an example:
24691 \begin_inset Formula
24693 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24694 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24699 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24700 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24701 \begin_inset Formula
24703 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24711 \begin_layout Standard
24712 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24719 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24720 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24723 reference "eq:asquared"
24728 The other types are described in section
24729 \begin_inset space ~
24733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24735 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24742 \begin_layout Section
24743 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24744 \begin_inset Index idx
24747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24748 Math ! Formula numbering
24754 \begin_inset Index idx
24757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 Math ! Referencing formulas
24764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24766 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24773 \begin_layout Standard
24774 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24776 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24777 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24779 \begin_inset space ~
24783 \begin_inset space ~
24791 arg "math-number-toggle"
24795 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24796 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24797 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24798 the document class.
24799 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24800 separated by a dot:
24801 \begin_inset Formula
24811 arg "math-number-toggle"
24814 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24815 You can only number displayed formulas.
24818 \begin_layout Standard
24819 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24821 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24822 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24824 \begin_inset space ~
24828 \begin_inset space ~
24836 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24839 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24840 \begin_inset Formula
24843 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24849 To number all lines use the shortcut
24852 arg "math-number-toggle"
24858 \begin_layout Standard
24859 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24862 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24863 A label is inserted with the menu
24865 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24874 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24875 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24876 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24888 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24889 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24890 We inserted in the following example the label
24891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24898 in the second line:
24899 \begin_inset Formula
24901 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24902 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24907 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24908 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24909 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24911 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24913 \begin_inset space ~
24921 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24925 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24926 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24927 as the formula number:
24930 \begin_layout Standard
24931 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24934 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24941 \begin_layout Standard
24942 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24943 \begin_inset space ~
24947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24949 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24954 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24962 \begin_layout Section
24963 User defined math macros
24964 \begin_inset Index idx
24967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 \begin_layout Standard
24977 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24978 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24979 Math macros are explained in section
24982 \begin_inset space ~
24994 \begin_layout Section
24998 \begin_layout Subsection
25000 \begin_inset Index idx
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 \begin_layout Standard
25013 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25014 To set a font in a formula, use the
25017 \begin_inset space ~
25025 arg "math-insert \\font"
25028 , or enter its command, listed in table
25029 \begin_inset space ~
25033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25035 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25042 \begin_layout Standard
25043 \begin_inset Float table
25048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25049 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25054 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25058 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25068 \begin_inset Tabular
25069 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25070 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25071 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25340 \begin_layout Standard
25341 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25365 \begin_layout Standard
25366 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25367 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25372 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25373 space when you need a space in the box.
25374 Here is an example where
25375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25386 denotes the set of numbers:
25387 \begin_inset Formula
25389 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25397 \begin_layout Standard
25398 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25399 You can, for example, put a character in
25408 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25412 \begin_inset Newline newline
25415 So it is better not to use this feature.
25418 \begin_layout Standard
25419 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25424 \begin_inset Newline newline
25427 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25433 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25434 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25440 \begin_layout Standard
25447 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25450 \begin_layout Standard
25451 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25453 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25454 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25456 \begin_inset space ~
25464 \begin_layout Subsection
25466 \begin_inset Index idx
25469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 \begin_layout Standard
25479 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25481 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25485 \begin_inset space ~
25489 \begin_inset space ~
25497 \begin_inset space ~
25505 arg "math-insert \\font"
25509 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25510 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25511 Here is an example:
25512 \begin_inset Formula
25515 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25516 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25525 \begin_layout Subsection
25527 \begin_inset Index idx
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 \begin_layout Standard
25540 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25541 automatically chosen in most situations.
25559 For most characters,
25567 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25568 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25573 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25574 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25576 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25579 arg "math-insert \\style"
25583 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25584 For example, you can set
25585 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25588 , which is normally in
25597 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25601 The four styles are used in the following example:
25604 \begin_layout Standard
25605 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25609 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25613 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25617 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25625 is set in a particular size with the menu
25627 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25629 \begin_inset space ~
25634 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25635 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25636 will be adjusted to correspond.
25637 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25652 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25658 \begin_layout Section
25660 \begin_inset Index idx
25663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25670 \begin_inset Index idx
25673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25682 \begin_layout Standard
25683 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25684 (AMS) that are in common use.
25687 \begin_layout Subsection
25688 Enabling AMS-Support
25691 \begin_layout Standard
25692 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25693 the document by selecting the checkbox
25696 \begin_inset space ~
25700 \begin_inset space ~
25704 \begin_inset space ~
25711 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25715 \begin_inset Index idx
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25719 Document ! Settings
25727 \begin_inset space ~
25733 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25734 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25737 \begin_layout Subsection
25739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25741 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25746 \begin_inset Index idx
25749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25750 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25758 \begin_layout Standard
25759 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25760 LyX allows you to choose between
25781 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25788 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25791 \begin_layout Chapter
25795 \begin_layout Section
25797 \begin_inset Index idx
25800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25809 name "sec:Cross-References"
25816 \begin_layout Standard
25817 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25818 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25820 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25821 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25822 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25825 \begin_layout Enumerate
25829 \begin_layout Enumerate
25830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25832 name "enu:Second-item"
25839 \begin_layout Enumerate
25843 \begin_layout Standard
25844 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25846 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25849 or by pressing the toolbar button
25856 A gray label box like this:
25857 \begin_inset Graphics
25858 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25863 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25864 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25899 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25900 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25916 \begin_layout Standard
25917 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25919 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25922 or the toolbar button
25925 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25929 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25930 \begin_inset Graphics
25931 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25936 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25938 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25951 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25955 \begin_layout Standard
25956 As an alternative to
25958 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25961 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25966 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25967 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25969 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25981 \begin_layout Standard
25982 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25983 \begin_inset space ~
25987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25989 reference "enu:Second-item"
25996 \begin_layout Standard
25997 It is recommended to use a protected space
26001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26002 described in section
26003 \begin_inset space ~
26007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26009 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26018 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26019 line breaks between them.
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 There are six formats of cross-references:
26026 \begin_layout Description
26027 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26030 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26037 \begin_layout Description
26038 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26039 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26051 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26058 \begin_layout Description
26059 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26060 \begin_inset space ~
26064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26065 LatexCommand pageref
26066 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26073 \begin_layout Description
26075 \begin_inset space ~
26079 \begin_inset space ~
26082 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26084 LatexCommand vpageref
26085 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26090 \begin_inset Newline newline
26093 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26094 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26095 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26096 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26097 it prints “on the next page”.
26098 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26101 \begin_layout Description
26103 \begin_inset space ~
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26114 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26117 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26122 \begin_inset Newline newline
26125 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26131 ; otherwise it behaves like
26135 \begin_inset space ~
26139 \begin_inset space ~
26148 \begin_layout Description
26150 \begin_inset space ~
26153 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26154 \begin_inset Newline newline
26158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26166 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26175 \begin_inset Index idx
26178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26179 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26185 \begin_inset Index idx
26188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26189 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26200 \begin_inset Newline newline
26203 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26206 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26210 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26211 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26219 is the default and preferred because
26223 supports only English documents.
26224 The format is specified by using the command
26236 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26237 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26250 ) can be done with this command
26251 \begin_inset Newline newline
26258 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26263 \begin_inset Newline newline
26266 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26268 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26270 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26277 \begin_layout Description
26279 \begin_inset space ~
26282 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26284 LatexCommand nameref
26285 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26292 \begin_layout Standard
26293 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26294 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26295 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26299 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26303 \begin_layout Standard
26304 You can only use the style
26308 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26312 is always possible.
26315 \begin_layout Standard
26316 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26317 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26319 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26320 \begin_inset space ~
26324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26326 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26333 \begin_layout Standard
26334 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26338 \begin_inset space ~
26342 \begin_inset space ~
26347 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26348 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26351 \begin_inset space ~
26356 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26357 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26360 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26366 \begin_layout Standard
26367 You can change labels at any time.
26368 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26369 do not need to think about this.
26372 \begin_layout Standard
26373 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26374 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26375 instead of the reference.
26378 \begin_layout Standard
26379 References are described in detail in the section
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26394 \begin_inset space ~
26402 \begin_layout Section
26403 Table of Contents and other Listings
26404 \begin_inset Index idx
26407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 \begin_inset Index idx
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26433 \begin_layout Subsection
26435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26437 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26444 \begin_layout Standard
26445 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26448 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26450 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_inset space ~
26460 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26461 If you click on it, the
26465 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26466 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26467 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26469 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26471 \begin_inset space ~
26476 that is described in section
26477 \begin_inset space ~
26481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26483 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26490 \begin_layout Standard
26491 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26492 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26494 \begin_inset space ~
26498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26500 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26504 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26506 \begin_inset space ~
26510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26512 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26516 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26518 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26521 \begin_layout Subsection
26522 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26525 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26532 \begin_layout Standard
26533 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26535 You can insert them via the
26537 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26541 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26544 \begin_layout Section
26545 URLs and Hyperlinks
26546 \begin_inset Index idx
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26556 \begin_inset Index idx
26559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 \begin_layout Subsection
26570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26579 \begin_layout Standard
26580 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26582 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26589 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26590 \begin_inset Flex URL
26593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 \begin_layout Standard
26604 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26610 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26631 \begin_layout Subsection
26633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26635 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26642 \begin_layout Standard
26643 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26645 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26648 or with the toolbar button
26655 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26664 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26665 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26666 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26668 name "LyX's homepage"
26669 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26673 , an Email address like this:
26674 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26676 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26677 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26682 , or a link to a file.
26685 \begin_layout Standard
26686 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26699 to the link target.
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26703 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26704 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26705 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26706 the text style dialog.
26707 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26713 name "LyX's homepage"
26714 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26721 \begin_layout Standard
26722 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26726 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26728 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26729 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26733 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26735 \begin_inset Newline newline
26743 \begin_inset Newline newline
26750 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26753 \begin_layout Section
26755 \begin_inset Index idx
26758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26767 name "sec:Appendices"
26774 \begin_layout Standard
26775 Appendices are created with the menu
26777 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26779 \begin_inset space ~
26783 \begin_inset space ~
26789 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26790 as the appendix part of the book.
26791 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26794 \begin_layout Standard
26795 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26796 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26797 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26798 and the subsection number.
26799 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26803 \begin_layout Standard
26805 \begin_inset space ~
26809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26811 reference "chap:Credits"
26816 \begin_inset space ~
26820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26822 reference "sub:Export"
26829 \begin_layout Section
26831 \begin_inset Index idx
26834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26843 name "sec:Bibliography"
26850 \begin_layout Standard
26851 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26852 You can include a bibliography database,
26856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26857 Known under the name
26858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26870 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26871 manually, using the paragraph environment
26875 , which was described in section
26876 \begin_inset space ~
26880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26882 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26887 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26888 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26892 use a bibliography database.
26895 \begin_layout Subsection
26896 The Bibliography Environment
26899 \begin_layout Standard
26904 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26906 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26915 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26917 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26926 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26929 \begin_layout Standard
26930 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26932 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26935 or the toolbar button
26938 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26942 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26943 containing the available citations.
26944 Select one or more keys from the list and
26954 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26955 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26959 \begin_layout Standard
26960 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26961 entry with surrounding brackets.
26966 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26967 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26979 \begin_layout Standard
26982 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26985 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26987 key "latexcompanion"
26994 \begin_layout Standard
26995 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27005 \begin_layout Standard
27006 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27009 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27011 \begin_inset space ~
27019 arg "layout-paragraph"
27023 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27026 \begin_layout Subsection
27027 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27028 \begin_inset Index idx
27031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27032 Bibliography ! Databases
27038 \begin_inset Index idx
27041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27042 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27050 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27057 \begin_layout Standard
27058 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27064 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27066 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27067 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27072 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27074 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27075 your working field in a database.
27076 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27077 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27078 list for that document.
27079 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27083 \begin_layout Standard
27084 The database is a text file with the file extension
27085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27096 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27097 The format is explained in
27098 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27104 and in the LaTeX books (
27105 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27107 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27112 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27113 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27114 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27115 \begin_inset Flex URL
27118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27128 \begin_layout Standard
27129 To use a database, use the menu
27131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27136 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27149 \begin_inset space ~
27155 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27156 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27163 Add bibliography to TOC
27165 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27170 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27171 in the document or just the cited references.
27174 \begin_layout Standard
27175 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27187 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27188 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27189 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27191 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27197 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27198 \begin_inset Newline newline
27202 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27204 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27216 \begin_layout Standard
27217 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27220 \begin_layout Standard
27221 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27222 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27228 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27229 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27234 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27235 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27236 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27251 The following variants are possible:
27254 \begin_layout Description
27255 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27256 with other bibliography packages (e.
27257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27261 \begin_inset space \space{}
27268 ), only with the package
27272 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27276 \begin_layout Description
27277 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27278 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27279 with all bibliography packages, except
27284 \begin_layout Description
27285 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27290 , works with all bibliography packages
27293 \begin_layout Standard
27294 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27296 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27302 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27311 \begin_layout Standard
27312 When you select the option
27314 Sectioned bibliography
27318 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27319 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27322 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27323 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27325 Customizing Bibliographies
27333 Additional Features
27338 \begin_layout Standard
27339 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27340 the two methods of creating them.
27341 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27342 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27343 We used the style file
27347 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27350 \begin_layout Subsection
27351 Bibliography layout
27352 \begin_inset Index idx
27355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27356 Bibliography ! Layout
27364 \begin_layout Standard
27365 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27366 For this feature you need to enable the option
27372 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27376 \begin_inset Index idx
27379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 Document ! Settings
27390 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27391 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27392 in the previous section.
27395 \begin_layout Standard
27396 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27397 the citation reference window.
27398 Here is an example where the text
27399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27403 \begin_inset space ~
27407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27410 appears after the reference:
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27418 key "latexcompanion"
27425 \begin_layout Section
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27446 \begin_layout Standard
27447 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27449 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27451 \begin_inset space ~
27456 or the toolbar button
27463 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27464 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27465 by LyX as the index entry.
27468 \begin_layout Standard
27469 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27471 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27472 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27474 \begin_inset space ~
27480 A light blue box labeled
27481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27492 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27493 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27496 \begin_layout Standard
27497 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27498 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27502 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27509 \begin_layout Subsection
27510 Grouping Index Entries
27511 \begin_inset Index idx
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27523 \begin_layout Standard
27524 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27526 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27527 lists under the entry
27528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27536 First we create the entry
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27545 \begin_inset space ~
27549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27551 reference "sub:Lists"
27556 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27557 \begin_inset space ~
27561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27563 reference "sec:Itemize"
27567 , we insert the command
27570 \begin_layout Standard
27576 \begin_layout Standard
27580 \begin_layout Standard
27586 \begin_layout Standard
27587 for the enumerated list in section
27588 \begin_inset space ~
27592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27594 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27601 \begin_layout Standard
27602 The exclamation mark
27603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27610 marks the grouping levels.
27611 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27612 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27613 If we don't have an index entry for
27614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27621 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27624 \begin_layout Subsection
27626 \begin_inset Index idx
27629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27630 Index ! Page ranges
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27639 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27641 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27642 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27643 an index entry in section
27644 \begin_inset space ~
27648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27650 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27660 Paragraph environments|(
27663 \begin_layout Standard
27664 and another entry at the end of section
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27671 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27678 \begin_layout Standard
27681 Paragraph environments|)
27684 \begin_layout Standard
27686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27709 respectively start and end the index range.
27710 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27711 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27712 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27713 An example is the index entry
27714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27717 Document ! Settings
27718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27724 \begin_layout Subsection
27726 \begin_inset Index idx
27729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27730 Index ! Cross referencing
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27740 We referred for example in the index entry
27741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27749 \begin_inset space ~
27753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27755 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27759 ) to the index entry
27760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27767 in the same section using the entry
27770 \begin_layout Standard
27773 GIF|see{Image formats}
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27777 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27778 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27779 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27782 \begin_layout Subsection
27784 \begin_inset Index idx
27787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27788 Index ! Entry order
27796 \begin_layout Standard
27797 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27798 follow the rules for the index order.
27799 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27804 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27806 \begin_inset space ~
27810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27812 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27821 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27822 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27847 \begin_inset Index idx
27850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 Dummy entries ! maïs
27857 \begin_inset Index idx
27860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 Dummy entries ! maître
27867 \begin_inset Index idx
27870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27871 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27876 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27877 maïs, maison, maître.
27878 To achieve this, we use the command
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27884 previous entry@current entry
27887 \begin_layout Standard
27888 In our case we want to have
27889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27904 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27915 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27916 See the next subsection for an example.
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27920 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27927 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27932 to generate the index (see sec.
27933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27939 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27948 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27956 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27960 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27961 index commands start with
27962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27974 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27979 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27982 \begin_layout Standard
27994 \begin_layout Standard
28006 \begin_layout Subsection
28008 \begin_inset Index idx
28011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28012 Index ! Entry layout
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28022 \begin_inset Index idx
28025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28028 This is an italic dummy entry
28033 You can also format the page number using the character
28034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28041 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28042 We can write for example
28045 \begin_layout Standard
28048 italic page number:|textit
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 to get the page number in italic.
28053 \begin_inset Index idx
28056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28057 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28062 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28080 \begin_inset space ~
28086 Have a look at section
28087 \begin_inset space ~
28091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28093 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28097 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28100 \begin_layout Standard
28101 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28113 to generate the index, see sec.
28114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28120 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28129 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28134 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28138 key "latexcompanion"
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28151 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28153 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28154 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28155 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28156 If so, put the following in the preamble
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28181 \begin_layout Standard
28182 in the index entry.
28183 \begin_inset Index idx
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28187 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28192 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28193 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28194 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28199 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28200 a bold font for all index entries.
28201 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28213 documentation for details,
28214 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28216 key "makeindex,xindy"
28223 \begin_layout Subsection
28225 \begin_inset Index idx
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28237 name "sub:Index-Program"
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28245 If the index generation program
28249 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28253 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28263 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28264 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28265 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28266 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28276 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28277 dialog, see section
28278 \begin_inset space ~
28282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28284 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28289 The available options are listed and explained in
28290 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28292 key "makeindex,xindy"
28297 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28303 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28306 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28307 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28311 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28312 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28315 \begin_layout Subsection
28319 \begin_layout Standard
28320 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28321 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28329 next to the standard index.
28330 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28331 that add this feature.
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28341 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28346 package to generate multiple indexes.
28347 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28352 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28353 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28360 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28361 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28362 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28370 \begin_layout Standard
28371 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28373 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28374 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28377 and select the option
28379 Use multiple Indexes
28386 already contains the standard index
28387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28395 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28396 also appear as a heading) to the
28400 input field and press the
28405 The new index now also appears in the list.
28406 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28410 \begin_layout Standard
28411 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28414 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28421 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28422 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28423 are additional features:
28426 \begin_layout Itemize
28427 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28428 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28431 \begin_layout Itemize
28432 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28433 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28441 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28442 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28443 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28444 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28447 \begin_layout Section
28448 Nomenclature/Glossary
28449 \begin_inset Index idx
28452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28459 \begin_inset Index idx
28462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28493 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28502 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28503 called nomenclature or glossary.
28506 \begin_layout Standard
28507 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28513 \begin_inset Index idx
28516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28517 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28523 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28524 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28530 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28533 \begin_layout Standard
28534 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28535 and then use the menu
28537 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28543 \begin_inset space ~
28548 or the toolbar button
28551 arg "nomencl-insert"
28556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28567 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28572 The first is the term or
28576 that you wish to define.
28581 of the term or symbol.
28584 \begin_layout Standard
28585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28593 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28601 \begin_layout Subsection
28602 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28603 \begin_inset Index idx
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 Nomenclature ! Layout
28615 \begin_layout Standard
28616 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28620 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28626 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28634 \begin_inset Newline newline
28642 \begin_inset Newline newline
28648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28655 character starts/ends the formula.
28656 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28668 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28678 \begin_layout Standard
28679 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28680 \begin_inset space ~
28684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28686 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28693 \begin_layout Standard
28697 \begin_inset space ~
28702 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28703 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28708 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28715 in this document is:
28716 \begin_inset Newline newline
28721 dummy entry for the character
28726 \begin_inset Newline newline
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28748 font use the command
28777 \begin_layout Standard
28778 If the characters |
28779 \begin_inset space \space{}
28783 \begin_inset space \space{}
28787 \begin_inset space \space{}
28791 \begin_inset space \space{}
28795 \begin_inset space \space{}
28798 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28799 a quote character in front of them.
28800 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28801 LatexCommand nomenclature
28802 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28803 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28810 \begin_layout Subsection
28811 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28812 \begin_inset Index idx
28815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28816 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28824 \begin_layout Standard
28825 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28826 the symbol definition.
28827 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28829 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28832 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28833 LatexCommand nomenclature
28835 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28842 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28846 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28847 LatexCommand nomenclature
28850 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28855 They will be sorted by
28856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28882 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28885 will be sorted before the
28889 since the character
28890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28897 is considered in sorting.
28900 \begin_layout Standard
28901 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28904 \begin_inset space ~
28909 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28910 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28912 For the example given, you can insert
28916 in this field for the
28917 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28924 will be located before
28925 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28931 \begin_layout Standard
28932 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28946 \begin_layout Subsection
28947 Nomenclature Options
28948 \begin_inset Index idx
28951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28952 Nomenclature ! Options
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28965 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28966 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28969 \begin_layout Description
28970 refeq Appends the phrase
28971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28986 to every nomenclature entry, where
28992 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28995 \begin_layout Description
28996 refpage Appends the phrase
28997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29012 to every nomenclature entry, where
29018 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29021 \begin_layout Description
29022 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29027 class options list in the
29029 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29033 In this document the options
29040 \begin_layout Standard
29041 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29047 \begin_layout Standard
29048 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29049 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29054 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29057 \begin_layout Description
29067 \begin_layout Description
29070 nomrefpage Like the
29077 \begin_layout Description
29080 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29089 \begin_layout Description
29093 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_inset space ~
29104 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29116 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29117 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29120 \begin_layout Standard
29128 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29131 \begin_inset Newline newline
29138 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29143 \begin_inset Newline newline
29147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29162 by their translation.
29165 \begin_layout Subsection
29166 Printing the Nomenclature
29167 \begin_inset Index idx
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29171 Nomenclature ! Printing
29179 \begin_layout Standard
29180 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29183 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29199 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29200 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29201 You can choose between these settings:
29204 \begin_layout Description
29205 Default a space of 1
29206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29212 \begin_layout Description
29214 \begin_inset space ~
29218 \begin_inset space ~
29221 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29224 \begin_layout Description
29225 Custom custom space
29228 \begin_layout Standard
29229 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29238 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29246 For example, in order to change the name to
29250 , add the following line to the preamble:
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29261 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29264 \begin_layout Subsection
29265 Nomenclature Program
29266 \begin_inset Index idx
29269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29270 Nomenclature ! Program
29276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29278 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29285 \begin_layout Standard
29286 LyX uses the program
29290 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29291 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29296 by adding options, see section
29297 \begin_inset space ~
29301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29303 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29308 The available options are listed and explained in
29309 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29311 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29318 \begin_layout Section
29320 \begin_inset Index idx
29323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29330 \begin_inset Index idx
29333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29334 Document ! Branches
29340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29342 name "sec:Branches"
29349 \begin_layout Standard
29350 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29351 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29352 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29353 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29356 \begin_layout Standard
29357 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29358 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29359 To create a branch, either select the menu
29361 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29362 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29365 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29367 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29374 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29375 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29376 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29377 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29378 (see below for an example).
29379 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29380 to the name of the other) and to add
29381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29393 \begin_inset space ~
29396 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29397 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29400 \begin_layout Standard
29401 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29402 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29404 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29407 where you can choose a branch.
29408 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29412 \begin_layout Standard
29413 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29414 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29417 \begin_layout Standard
29418 \begin_inset Branch Question
29421 \begin_layout Standard
29422 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29431 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29434 \begin_layout Standard
29435 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29450 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29451 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29454 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29455 Consider for example a file
29456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29463 which has the above branches.
29465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29472 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29496 branch were inactive,
29497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29512 branch was active, likewise
29513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29528 branch was active, and
29529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29532 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29536 if both branches were active.
29537 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29540 \begin_layout Standard
29541 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29548 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29549 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29551 For example you can define for the question branch
29555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29556 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29557 \begin_inset space ~
29561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29563 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29575 \begin_layout Standard
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29595 \begin_layout Standard
29596 and for the answer branch
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29609 \begin_layout Standard
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29620 \begin_inset Branch Question
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 \begin_layout Standard
29656 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29691 \begin_layout Standard
29692 Now it is possible to use the
29696 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29703 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29706 commands to obtain conditional output.
29707 Here is an example formula where only the
29714 \begin_inset Formula
29716 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29725 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29733 \begin_layout Standard
29734 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29740 \begin_inset space \space{}
29743 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29744 For this advanced usage, see the
29749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29752 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29759 \begin_layout Section
29761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29763 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29768 \begin_inset Index idx
29771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29783 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29784 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29787 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29789 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29794 \begin_inset Index idx
29797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29798 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29803 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29804 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29805 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29806 part of the document.
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29811 The header information in the dialog tab
29815 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29816 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29817 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29818 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29822 \begin_inset space ~
29826 \begin_inset space ~
29831 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29832 title and author entries.
29836 \begin_inset space ~
29840 \begin_inset space ~
29844 \begin_inset space ~
29849 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29852 \begin_layout Standard
29853 You can specify in the dialog tab
29857 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29862 \begin_inset space ~
29866 \begin_inset space ~
29870 \begin_inset space ~
29875 option allows long links to be split;
29878 \begin_inset space ~
29882 \begin_inset space ~
29886 \begin_inset space ~
29894 \begin_inset space ~
29899 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29902 \begin_inset space ~
29907 colors the different links.
29908 The default colors are:
29911 \begin_layout Labeling
29912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29917 for hyperlinks and URLs
29920 \begin_layout Labeling
29921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29929 \begin_layout Labeling
29930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29938 \begin_layout Standard
29939 but you can change these in the field
29944 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29950 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29953 \begin_layout Standard
29958 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29959 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29960 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29963 \begin_layout Standard
29968 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29969 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29970 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29980 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29981 when opening the PDF.
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29986 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29987 \begin_inset space ~
29990 1 will only display the sections.
29993 \begin_layout Standard
29994 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29995 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30001 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30002 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30011 \begin_layout Section
30012 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30015 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30022 \begin_layout Subsection
30024 \begin_inset Index idx
30027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30036 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30043 \begin_layout Standard
30044 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30045 constructs, but not all.
30046 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30047 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30048 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30049 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30050 and their commands.
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30054 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30056 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30058 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30076 or by the toolbar button
30089 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30097 \begin_layout Standard
30098 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30099 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30100 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30101 using the LaTeX-command
30107 , you can write the command part
30113 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30117 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30118 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30119 the following example:
30122 \begin_layout Standard
30123 \begin_inset Graphics
30124 filename clipart/ERT.png
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 This is a line with a
30141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30173 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30174 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30182 \begin_layout Subsection
30183 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30184 \begin_inset Argument 1
30187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30194 \begin_inset Index idx
30197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30206 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30213 \begin_layout Standard
30214 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30215 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30216 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30225 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30226 any time if you know the right commands.
30227 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30228 is the end of the day.
30229 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30230 all caption labels bold.
30231 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30233 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30237 \begin_layout Standard
30238 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30239 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30240 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30242 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30251 \begin_layout Standard
30252 As result you find that the package
30257 \begin_inset Index idx
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30267 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30269 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30272 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30295 \begin_layout Standard
30300 usepackage[options]{package name}
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30304 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30305 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30306 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 In your case the package name is
30315 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30320 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30321 So you add the command
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30329 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30332 \begin_layout Standard
30333 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30338 For more commands provided by the
30342 package, have a look at its documentation,
30343 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30357 \begin_layout Standard
30358 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30360 For example if you use a
30364 class, you don't need the package
30368 , you can instead write
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30376 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30381 \begin_layout Standard
30382 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30383 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30384 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30391 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30394 \begin_layout Standard
30395 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30396 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30398 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30399 the previous section.
30402 \begin_layout Standard
30403 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30405 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30407 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30414 \begin_layout Standard
30415 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30421 \begin_layout Standard
30425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30435 \begin_inset Note Note
30438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30439 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30447 \begin_layout Left Header
30448 \begin_inset Argument 1
30451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30471 \begin_inset Note Note
30474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30475 defines the header line as described below
30483 \begin_layout Center Header
30484 \begin_inset Argument 1
30487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30496 \begin_layout Right Header
30497 \begin_inset Argument 1
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30521 \begin_layout Left Footer
30522 \begin_inset Argument 1
30525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 \begin_layout Center Footer
30547 \begin_inset Argument 1
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 \begin_inset Newline newline
30565 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30571 \begin_layout Right Footer
30572 \begin_inset Argument 1
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30597 \begin_layout Section
30598 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30601 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30606 \begin_inset Index idx
30609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 Document ! Header/Footer line
30616 \begin_inset Index idx
30619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30628 \begin_layout Standard
30629 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30633 \begin_inset space ~
30644 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30650 \begin_inset space ~
30656 As a second step add in the menu
30658 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30659 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30666 Custom Header/Footerlines
30667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30671 This module offers the following 6
30672 \begin_inset space ~
30678 \begin_layout Description
30680 \begin_inset space ~
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30688 \begin_inset space ~
30692 \begin_inset space ~
30696 \begin_inset space ~
30702 \begin_layout Description
30704 \begin_inset space ~
30708 \begin_inset space ~
30712 \begin_inset space ~
30716 \begin_inset space ~
30720 \begin_inset space ~
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30730 \begin_layout Standard
30731 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30732 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30734 \begin_inset space ~
30738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30740 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30744 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30747 \begin_layout Standard
30748 \begin_inset Float figure
30754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30757 \begin_inset Tabular
30758 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30759 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30760 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30761 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30762 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30782 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30811 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30822 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 The normal text on the page goes here.
30827 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30829 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30830 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30835 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30844 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30873 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30902 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30920 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30925 name "fig:Page-layout"
30929 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30942 \begin_layout Standard
30943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30951 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30955 \begin_inset space ~
30960 is set to “Default”.
30961 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30970 \begin_layout Subsection
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30975 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30976 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30977 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30978 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30980 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30981 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30984 \begin_layout Standard
30985 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 \begin_inset space ~
31009 \begin_layout Description
31012 thepage prints the current page number
31015 \begin_layout Description
31018 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31021 \begin_layout Description
31024 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31027 \begin_layout Description
31030 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31031 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31038 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31041 because it usually goes in a left header.
31044 \begin_layout Description
31047 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31048 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31050 It is normally used in the right header.
31053 \begin_layout Subsection
31054 Default header/footer
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31059 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31060 footer has the page number.
31061 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31062 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31063 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31066 \begin_inset space ~
31074 \begin_layout Subsection
31078 \begin_layout Standard
31079 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31080 Some pages are different.
31081 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31082 a new part or chapter in your book.
31083 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31084 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31085 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31089 Header and footer decoration line
31092 \begin_layout Standard
31093 By default, you get a 0.4
31094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31097 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31098 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31110 in the following way:
31113 \begin_layout Standard
31120 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31123 \begin_layout Standard
31124 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31133 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31140 \begin_layout Standard
31141 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31142 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31143 \begin_inset space ~
31147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31157 Several header/footer lines
31160 \begin_layout Standard
31161 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31162 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31163 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31165 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31179 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31180 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31193 \begin_inset space ~
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31208 headheight}{height}
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31212 where height is a size in standard units.
31213 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31214 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31215 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31217 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31234 \begin_inset space ~
31239 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31244 \begin_inset Index idx
31247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31254 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31255 for your header/footer.
31258 \begin_layout Subsection
31262 \begin_layout Standard
31263 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31264 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31265 This example consists of the following definition:
31268 \begin_layout Description
31270 \begin_inset space ~
31279 , empty optional argument
31282 \begin_layout Description
31284 \begin_inset space ~
31287 Header empty, empty optional argument
31290 \begin_layout Description
31292 \begin_inset space ~
31301 in the optional argument
31304 \begin_layout Description
31306 \begin_inset space ~
31315 in the optional argument
31318 \begin_layout Description
31320 \begin_inset space ~
31332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31336 \begin_inset Newline newline
31340 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31347 in the optional argument
31350 \begin_layout Description
31352 \begin_inset space ~
31361 , empty optional argument
31364 \begin_layout Description
31367 headrulewidth set to 2
31368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31374 \begin_layout Standard
31375 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31376 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31391 \begin_layout Standard
31392 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31398 \begin_layout Standard
31402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31406 pagestyle{headings}
31412 \begin_inset Note Note
31415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31416 switches back to page style with the default headings
31424 \begin_layout Section
31425 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31428 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31433 \begin_inset Index idx
31436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31443 \begin_inset Index idx
31446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31455 \begin_layout Standard
31456 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31457 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31458 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31461 \begin_layout Subsection
31465 \begin_layout Standard
31466 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31471 \begin_inset Index idx
31474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31475 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31480 (on some systems named simply
31485 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31487 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31493 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31494 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31502 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31503 automatically installed together with LyX.
31506 \begin_layout Subsection
31510 \begin_layout Standard
31511 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31512 LaTeX, activate the option
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31522 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31528 \begin_inset space ~
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31535 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31542 \begin_inset space ~
31555 \begin_inset space ~
31560 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31564 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31568 \begin_inset space ~
31576 \begin_inset space ~
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31585 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31590 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31598 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31599 generated by activating the option
31602 \begin_inset space ~
31608 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31616 \begin_layout Subsection
31617 Selected document parts
31620 \begin_layout Standard
31621 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31622 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31623 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31624 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31626 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31630 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31631 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31632 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31635 \begin_layout Standard
31636 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31642 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31653 is explained in section
31655 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31660 \begin_inset space ~
31670 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31671 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31673 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31675 Here is the result:
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 \begin_inset Preview
31681 \begin_layout Standard
31686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31690 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31696 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31706 height_special "totalheight"
31709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31734 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31740 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31762 \begin_layout Standard
31763 Previewing works also for colors.
31764 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 is explained in section
31789 \begin_inset space ~
31802 \begin_layout Standard
31803 \begin_inset Preview
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31828 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31833 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31852 \begin_layout Standard
31853 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31859 \begin_layout Standard
31860 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31861 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31862 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31864 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31865 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31866 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31867 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31871 \begin_layout Subsection
31875 \begin_layout Standard
31876 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31879 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31881 \begin_inset space ~
31886 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31887 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31889 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31890 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31891 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31892 the source view window.
31897 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31898 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31899 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31902 \begin_layout Section
31903 Advanced Find and Replace
31904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31906 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31911 \begin_inset Index idx
31914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31921 \begin_inset Index idx
31924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31933 \begin_layout Subsection
31937 \begin_layout Standard
31938 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31939 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31940 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31941 The key-features are:
31944 \begin_layout Itemize
31945 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31946 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31947 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31951 \begin_layout Itemize
31952 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31953 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31954 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31955 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31958 \begin_layout Itemize
31959 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31960 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31961 outside of mathematics environments
31964 \begin_layout Itemize
31965 Search may be widened to a specific
31970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31974 \begin_inset space ~
31977 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31978 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31985 \begin_layout Itemize
31986 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31987 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31992 \begin_inset space ~
31995 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31998 \begin_layout Subsection
32002 \begin_layout Standard
32003 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32005 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32018 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32021 ) or the toolbar button
32024 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32030 Advanced Find and Replace
32035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32039 \begin_layout Standard
32044 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32048 \begin_inset space ~
32053 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32056 arg "break-paragraph"
32060 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32061 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32065 arg "break-paragraph"
32068 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32072 searches backwards.
32075 \begin_layout Standard
32079 \begin_inset space ~
32084 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32093 \begin_inset space ~
32098 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32102 Searching for mathematics
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32106 Mathematical formulas, such as
32107 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32110 or something more complex like
32111 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32114 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32119 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32120 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32121 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32122 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32132 \begin_layout Standard
32133 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32134 This is done by switching to the
32138 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32143 This way, entering in the
32150 \begin_layout Itemize
32151 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32152 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32155 \begin_layout Itemize
32156 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32157 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32160 \begin_layout Itemize
32161 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32162 of it only within section headings.
32163 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32164 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32168 \begin_layout Itemize
32169 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32170 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32178 The entries made in the
32182 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32185 \begin_inset space ~
32191 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32195 button or alternatively press
32198 arg "break-paragraph"
32205 while the cursor is in the
32208 \begin_inset space ~
32216 \begin_layout Standard
32217 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32218 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32222 \begin_layout Itemize
32223 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32224 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32232 with its typewriter version
32233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32247 \begin_layout Itemize
32248 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32254 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32266 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32273 (you may want to enable the
32276 \begin_inset space ~
32284 \begin_inset space ~
32289 options and disable the
32297 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32305 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32306 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32310 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32313 , or occurrences of
32314 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32318 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32324 \begin_layout Subsection
32328 \begin_layout Standard
32329 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32334 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32336 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32338 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32347 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32353 This is done with the context menu
32355 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32356 Insert Regular Expression
32358 while the cursor is in the
32363 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32364 expression matching rules
32368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32369 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32375 \begin_inset space ~
32378 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32379 to match expressions.
32384 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32385 same text in the document.
32386 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32387 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32390 \begin_layout Enumerate
32391 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32396 editor the fraction
32397 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32401 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32404 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32405 fractions with the given denominator.
32408 \begin_layout Enumerate
32409 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32421 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32426 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32427 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32428 Also, by inserting a
32429 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32432 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32433 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32436 \begin_layout Standard
32437 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32438 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32439 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32442 , and referring back to them through
32443 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32447 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32451 For example, try searching with the regexp
32452 \begin_inset Newline newline
32455 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32458 \begin_inset Newline newline
32461 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32464 \begin_layout Standard
32465 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32477 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32478 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32479 sub-expressions is absolute.
32481 \begin_inset space ~
32485 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32488 always refers to the first occurrence of
32489 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32492 in all entered regexps.
32500 \begin_layout Section
32502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32504 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32509 \begin_inset Index idx
32512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32522 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32525 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32532 key or the toolbar button
32535 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32538 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32539 beginning of the currently selected text.
32540 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32541 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32542 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32543 scrolled so that it is visible.
32544 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32545 n, if any could be found.
32546 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32550 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32551 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32554 \begin_layout Standard
32555 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32558 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32562 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32563 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32564 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32565 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32568 \begin_inset space ~
32576 arg "dialog-show character"
32579 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32580 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32585 \begin_inset Newline newline
32589 \begin_inset Flex URL
32592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32594 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32600 \begin_inset Newline newline
32604 \begin_inset space ~
32607 files for each language.
32608 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32609 \begin_inset space ~
32612 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32621 \begin_inset Newline newline
32624 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32625 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32626 but in most cases these are
32642 is the language code.
32645 \begin_layout Subsection
32649 \begin_layout Standard
32652 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32653 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32655 \begin_inset space ~
32658 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32661 you can set the following things:
32664 \begin_layout Description
32666 \begin_inset space ~
32669 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32670 Depending on your platform,
32684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32685 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32686 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32701 \begin_layout Description
32703 \begin_inset space ~
32706 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32707 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32710 \begin_layout Description
32712 \begin_inset space ~
32715 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32721 \begin_inset space \space{}
32725 This should normally not be needed.
32728 \begin_layout Description
32730 \begin_inset space ~
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32737 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32749 \begin_layout Description
32751 \begin_inset space ~
32754 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32755 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32756 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32757 appear in a context menu.
32758 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32762 \begin_layout Description
32764 \begin_inset space ~
32768 \begin_inset space ~
32772 \begin_inset space ~
32775 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32779 \begin_layout Section
32781 \begin_inset Index idx
32784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32793 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32801 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32802 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32812 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32814 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32823 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32824 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32825 which are available for many languages.
32828 \begin_layout Standard
32829 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32833 \begin_layout Subsection
32834 Setting up the thesaurus
32837 \begin_layout Standard
32846 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32850 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32855 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32861 \begin_inset space ~
32869 For instance, the US English files are named:
32872 \begin_layout Itemize
32876 \begin_layout Itemize
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32889 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32890 and you just need to point LyX (in
32892 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32893 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32894 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32896 \begin_inset space ~
32901 ) to the path where they are installed.
32905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32906 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32907 ies, typical locations are
32913 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32917 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32921 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32924 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32930 LibreOffice-<Version>
32937 On the Mac, the default location is
32939 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32940 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32941 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32942 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32943 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32944 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32952 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32953 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32954 correct place right away.
32957 \begin_layout Standard
32958 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32959 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32963 \begin_layout Itemize
32964 \begin_inset Flex URL
32967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32977 \begin_layout Standard
32978 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32979 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32981 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32982 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32983 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32985 \begin_inset space ~
32991 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32992 and point LyX there.
32995 \begin_layout Standard
32996 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32998 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33001 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33007 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33010 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33018 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33019 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33020 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33022 \begin_inset space ~
33027 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33030 \begin_layout Subsection
33031 Using the thesaurus
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33037 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33040 or the toolbar button
33043 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33046 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33048 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33050 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33051 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33052 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33061 ), related terms (such as
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33073 ), compounds (such as
33076 \begin_inset space ~
33085 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33094 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33097 \begin_layout Standard
33098 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33099 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33104 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33105 the dictionary, such as the above
33109 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33114 \begin_inset space \space{}
33117 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33118 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33119 For example, looking up the word form
33123 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33128 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33133 \begin_inset space \space{}
33144 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33145 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33146 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33149 \begin_layout Section
33151 \begin_inset Index idx
33154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33161 \begin_inset Index idx
33164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 Document ! Change Tracking
33171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33173 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33182 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33183 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33184 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33186 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33191 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33193 \begin_inset space ~
33201 \begin_layout Standard
33202 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33216 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33217 You can change the color in
33219 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33220 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33237 \begin_inset Index idx
33240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33241 Color ! Change tracking
33246 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33247 the cursor is in changed text.
33248 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33251 arg "changes-merge"
33257 \begin_layout Standard
33258 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33259 \begin_inset Index idx
33262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33271 \begin_layout Standard
33272 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33279 \begin_inset Graphics
33280 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33289 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33296 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33300 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33306 \begin_layout Standard
33307 \begin_inset Tabular
33308 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33309 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33310 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33311 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33321 arg "changes-track"
33329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33335 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33337 \begin_inset space ~
33340 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33342 \begin_inset space ~
33351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33360 arg "changes-output"
33368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33376 \begin_inset space ~
33379 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33381 \begin_inset space ~
33385 \begin_inset space ~
33389 \begin_inset space ~
33398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33419 Jumps to the next change
33425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 arg "change-accept"
33442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33448 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33450 \begin_inset space ~
33453 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33455 \begin_inset space ~
33464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33473 arg "change-reject"
33481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33487 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33489 \begin_inset space ~
33492 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 arg "changes-merge"
33520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33526 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33528 \begin_inset space ~
33531 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33533 \begin_inset space ~
33542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33551 arg "all-changes-accept"
33559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33565 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33567 \begin_inset space ~
33570 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33572 \begin_inset space ~
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33594 arg "all-changes-reject"
33602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33608 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33610 \begin_inset space ~
33613 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33651 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33652 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33665 \begin_inset space ~
33674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33697 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33699 \begin_inset space ~
33715 \begin_layout Standard
33716 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33722 \begin_layout Standard
33723 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33743 \begin_layout Standard
33744 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33745 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33746 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33747 the next change after the current cursor position.
33748 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33749 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33750 step to the next change.
33751 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33754 \begin_layout Standard
33755 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33756 to describe a change.
33759 \begin_layout Standard
33760 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33765 \begin_inset Index idx
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33775 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33776 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33782 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33785 \begin_layout Section
33786 Comparison of Documents
33787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33789 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33794 \begin_inset Index idx
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33798 Comparison of documents
33806 \begin_layout Standard
33807 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33809 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33813 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33815 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33816 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33820 \begin_inset space ~
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33828 \begin_inset space ~
33837 \begin_inset space ~
33841 \begin_inset space ~
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33849 \begin_inset space ~
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33862 enables the change tracking option
33865 \begin_inset space ~
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33878 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33881 \begin_layout Section
33882 International Support
33883 \begin_inset Index idx
33886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33887 International support
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33896 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33897 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33898 up LyX to use them:
33899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33901 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33908 \begin_layout Standard
33909 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33910 \begin_inset space ~
33914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33916 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33923 \begin_layout Subsection
33925 \begin_inset Index idx
33928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33935 \begin_inset Index idx
33938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33939 Document ! Settings
33945 \begin_inset Index idx
33948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33949 Document ! Language
33957 \begin_layout Standard
33960 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33961 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33964 dialog lets you set
33966 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33971 \begin_layout Standard
33976 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33980 \begin_inset space ~
33985 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33986 For details about the different encoding options see section
33987 \begin_inset space ~
33991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33993 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34000 \begin_layout Subsection
34001 Keyboard mapping configuration
34002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34004 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34011 \begin_layout Standard
34012 If you have for example a U.
34013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34016 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34017 can use an alternate keymap.
34018 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34019 use an Italian keymap.
34022 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34023 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34024 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34027 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34034 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34039 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34040 which one you want to use.
34043 \begin_layout Standard
34044 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34045 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34046 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34050 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34051 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34052 one to support the characters you want.
34053 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34060 \begin_layout Chapter
34063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34065 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34072 \begin_layout Standard
34073 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34074 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34075 topic inside the user's guide.
34078 \begin_layout Section
34080 \begin_inset Index idx
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34097 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34100 \begin_layout Subsection
34104 \begin_layout Standard
34105 Creates a new document.
34108 \begin_layout Subsection
34112 \begin_layout Standard
34113 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34114 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34115 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34118 \begin_layout Subsection
34122 \begin_layout Standard
34126 \begin_layout Subsection
34130 \begin_layout Standard
34131 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34132 Click there on a file to open it.
34135 \begin_layout Subsection
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34140 Closes the current document.
34143 \begin_layout Subsection
34147 \begin_layout Standard
34148 Closes all opened documents.
34151 \begin_layout Subsection
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34156 Saves the actual document.
34159 \begin_layout Subsection
34163 \begin_layout Standard
34164 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34167 \begin_layout Subsection
34171 \begin_layout Standard
34172 Saves all opened documents.
34175 \begin_layout Subsection
34179 \begin_layout Standard
34180 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34183 \begin_layout Subsection
34187 \begin_layout Standard
34188 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34189 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34190 It is described in the section
34192 Version Control in LyX
34196 Additional Features
34201 \begin_layout Subsection
34205 \begin_layout Standard
34206 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34207 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34209 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34213 When using the menu entry
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34221 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34233 \begin_inset space ~
34238 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34239 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34242 \begin_layout Subsection
34244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34254 You can export your document to various file formats.
34255 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34256 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34257 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34260 \begin_layout Standard
34261 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34269 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34276 \begin_layout Description
34282 \begin_inset space ~
34289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34296 yX format of the special LyX
34297 \begin_inset space ~
34300 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34301 \begin_inset Newline newline
34304 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34307 \begin_layout Description
34308 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34314 \begin_layout Description
34316 \begin_inset space ~
34319 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34325 \begin_layout Description
34326 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34327 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34328 files paths or file names in your document.
34329 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34336 \begin_layout Description
34337 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34338 in files paths or file names
34341 \begin_layout Description
34343 \begin_inset space ~
34350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34357 eX) DVI-format using the program
34361 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34380 \begin_layout Description
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34385 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34389 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34394 \begin_layout Description
34395 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34399 \begin_layout Description
34401 \begin_inset space ~
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34408 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34412 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34420 \begin_layout Description
34427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34435 \begin_inset space ~
34446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34459 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34464 \begin_layout Description
34471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34479 \begin_inset space ~
34484 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34485 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34489 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34492 \begin_layout Description
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34512 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34513 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34521 \begin_layout Description
34528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34536 \begin_inset space ~
34547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34560 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34565 \begin_layout Description
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34589 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34590 music notation software
34595 \begin_layout Description
34602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34612 \begin_inset space ~
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34619 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34620 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34621 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34624 \begin_layout Description
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34641 \begin_inset space ~
34644 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34660 represent the version number)
34663 \begin_layout Description
34670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34679 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34682 \begin_layout Description
34683 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34688 \begin_layout Description
34689 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34691 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34694 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34698 \begin_layout Description
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34707 PDF-format using the program
34711 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34714 \begin_layout Description
34718 \begin_inset space ~
34725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34734 PDF-format using the program
34738 , produces PDF-files directly
34741 \begin_layout Description
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34750 PDF-format using the program
34754 , produces PDF-files directly
34757 \begin_layout Description
34761 \begin_inset space ~
34766 PDF-format using the program
34770 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34773 \begin_layout Description
34777 \begin_inset space ~
34784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34793 PDF-format using the program
34797 , produces PDF-files directly
34800 \begin_layout Description
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34812 \begin_layout Description
34816 \begin_inset space ~
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34825 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34826 and then exported as text using the program
34831 \begin_layout Description
34836 PostScript format using the program
34841 \begin_layout Description
34842 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34843 programming language
34856 it is possible to use
34863 \begin_layout Standard
34864 If one of the menu entries
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34880 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34881 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34888 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34893 \begin_inset Index idx
34896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 Reconfiguration of LyX
34905 \begin_layout Subsection
34909 \begin_layout Standard
34910 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34911 format or send it to a printer.
34912 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34913 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34919 For more information have a look at section
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34926 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34933 \begin_layout Subsection
34937 \begin_layout Standard
34938 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34939 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34940 prefix, see section
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34947 reference "sec:Paths"
34952 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34961 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34962 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34969 reference "sub:Converters"
34976 \begin_layout Subsection
34977 New and Close Window
34980 \begin_layout Standard
34981 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34984 \begin_layout Subsection
34988 \begin_layout Standard
34989 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34992 \begin_layout Section
34994 \begin_inset Index idx
34997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35006 \begin_layout Subsection
35010 \begin_layout Standard
35011 Described in section
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35018 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35025 \begin_layout Subsection
35026 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35029 \begin_layout Standard
35030 Described in section
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35037 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35044 \begin_layout Subsection
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35049 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35050 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35053 \begin_layout Subsection
35057 \begin_layout Standard
35058 Selects the whole document.
35061 \begin_layout Subsection
35062 Find & Replace (Quick)
35065 \begin_layout Standard
35066 Described in section
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35073 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35080 \begin_layout Subsection
35081 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35084 \begin_layout Standard
35085 Described in section
35086 \begin_inset space ~
35090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35092 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35099 \begin_layout Subsection
35100 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35103 \begin_layout Standard
35104 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35108 \begin_layout Subsection
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 Described in section
35114 \begin_inset space ~
35118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35120 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35127 \begin_layout Subsection
35129 \begin_inset Index idx
35132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35133 Paragraph ! Settings
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35143 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35148 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35149 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35155 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35156 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35158 \begin_inset space ~
35166 \begin_layout Subsection
35170 \begin_layout Standard
35171 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35172 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35173 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35177 \begin_layout Standard
35178 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35180 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35181 The properties of tables are described in section
35182 \begin_inset space ~
35186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35188 reference "sec:Tables"
35192 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35199 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35206 \begin_layout Subsection
35207 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
35213 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35220 reference "sec:Nesting"
35225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35227 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35234 \begin_layout Section
35236 \begin_inset Index idx
35239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 \begin_layout Standard
35249 At the bottom of the
35253 menu the opened documents are listed.
35256 \begin_layout Subsection
35257 Open/Close all Insets
35260 \begin_layout Standard
35261 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35264 \begin_layout Subsection
35265 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35268 \begin_layout Standard
35269 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35272 \begin_layout Standard
35273 Math macros are described in the
35280 \begin_layout Subsection
35284 \begin_layout Standard
35285 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35286 \begin_inset space ~
35290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35292 reference "sec:Navigating"
35297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35299 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35306 \begin_layout Subsection
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35311 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35319 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35326 \begin_layout Subsection
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35331 Opens a window showing console messages.
35332 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35336 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35337 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35340 \begin_layout Subsection
35342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35344 name "sub:Toolbars"
35349 \begin_inset Index idx
35352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35361 \begin_layout Standard
35362 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35363 All toolbars and the
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35371 can be turned on and off.
35376 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35388 \begin_inset space ~
35400 \begin_inset space ~
35405 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35409 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35421 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35425 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35426 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35427 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35428 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35429 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35432 \begin_layout Standard
35433 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35440 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35447 \begin_layout Subsection
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35455 \begin_inset space ~
35459 \begin_inset space ~
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35480 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35483 \begin_inset space ~
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35508 will split it horizontally.
35509 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35510 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35511 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35512 three or more documents at the same time.
35513 To close a split view, use the menu
35516 \begin_inset space ~
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35533 Closes a split view.
35536 \begin_layout Subsection
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35542 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35543 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35544 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35545 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35548 \begin_layout Section
35550 \begin_inset Index idx
35553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35562 \begin_layout Subsection
35566 \begin_layout Standard
35567 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35568 \begin_inset space ~
35572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35574 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35585 \begin_layout Subsection
35587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35589 name "sub:Special-Character"
35596 \begin_layout Standard
35597 Here you can insert the following characters:
35600 \begin_layout Description
35605 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35607 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35608 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35609 You can get a complete display by checking
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35618 \begin_inset Newline newline
35622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35630 Not all characters will be visible in the
35634 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35642 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35646 ) can display every character.
35654 \begin_layout Description
35655 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35659 \begin_layout Description
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35668 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35675 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35682 \begin_layout Description
35684 \begin_inset space ~
35687 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35690 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35691 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35697 \begin_layout Description
35699 \begin_inset space ~
35702 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35705 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35706 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35712 \begin_layout Description
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35717 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35721 \begin_layout Description
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35726 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35730 \begin_layout Description
35732 \begin_inset space ~
35735 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35741 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35747 \begin_layout Description
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35752 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35756 \begin_layout Description
35758 \begin_inset space ~
35762 \begin_inset Index idx
35765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35772 \begin_inset Index idx
35775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35776 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35781 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35782 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35784 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35789 \begin_inset Index idx
35792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35793 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35799 \begin_inset Newline newline
35802 More information about this feature can be found in the
35808 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35814 \begin_layout Subsection
35818 \begin_layout Standard
35819 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35822 \begin_layout Description
35823 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35824 \begin_inset script superscript
35826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35835 \begin_layout Description
35836 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35837 \begin_inset script subscript
35839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35848 \begin_layout Description
35850 \begin_inset space ~
35853 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35860 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35867 \begin_layout Description
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35872 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35879 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35886 \begin_layout Description
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35891 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35898 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35905 \begin_layout Description
35907 \begin_inset space ~
35910 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35916 \begin_inset space \space{}
35919 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35920 An example from the LyX
35925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35928 To insert a fraction use the command
35933 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35937 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35946 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35953 \begin_layout Description
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35958 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35965 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35972 \begin_layout Description
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35977 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35984 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35991 \begin_layout Description
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35996 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36003 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36010 \begin_layout Description
36011 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36018 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36025 \begin_layout Description
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36030 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36031 \begin_inset space ~
36035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36037 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36044 \begin_layout Description
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36049 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36056 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36063 \begin_layout Description
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36072 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36079 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36086 \begin_layout Description
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36091 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36092 as described in section
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36099 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36106 \begin_layout Description
36108 \begin_inset space ~
36111 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36118 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36125 \begin_layout Description
36127 \begin_inset space ~
36130 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36131 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36139 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36146 \begin_layout Description
36148 \begin_inset space ~
36151 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36158 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36165 \begin_layout Description
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36174 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36181 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36188 \begin_layout Subsection
36192 \begin_layout Standard
36193 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36218 are described in section
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36225 reference "sec:toc"
36234 is described in section
36235 \begin_inset space ~
36239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36241 reference "sec:Index"
36249 is described in section
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36256 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36262 BibTeX Bibliography
36264 is described in section
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36271 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36278 \begin_layout Subsection
36282 \begin_layout Standard
36283 To insert floats, as described in section
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36290 reference "sec:Floats"
36294 and in detail the chapter
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36309 \begin_layout Subsection
36313 \begin_layout Standard
36314 To insert notes, described in section
36315 \begin_inset space ~
36319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36321 reference "sec:Notes"
36328 \begin_layout Subsection
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36335 Branches are described in section
36336 \begin_inset space ~
36340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36342 reference "sec:Branches"
36349 \begin_layout Subsection
36353 \begin_layout Standard
36354 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36355 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36357 An example is the document class
36358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36365 with three custom insets.
36368 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36372 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36378 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36381 \begin_layout Subsection
36383 \begin_inset Index idx
36386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36395 \begin_layout Standard
36396 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36398 For more information see chapter
36400 External Document Parts
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_layout Subsection
36411 \begin_inset Index idx
36414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36423 \begin_layout Standard
36424 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36425 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36440 \begin_layout Subsection
36444 \begin_layout Standard
36449 dialog as described in section
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36456 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36463 \begin_layout Subsection
36467 \begin_layout Standard
36472 as described in section
36473 \begin_inset space ~
36477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36479 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36486 \begin_layout Subsection
36490 \begin_layout Standard
36495 as described in section
36496 \begin_inset space ~
36500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36502 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36509 \begin_layout Subsection
36511 \begin_inset Index idx
36514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36521 \begin_inset Index idx
36524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36525 Longtables ! Caption
36533 \begin_layout Standard
36534 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36535 Floats are described in section
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36542 reference "sec:Floats"
36546 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36553 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_layout Subsection
36565 \begin_layout Standard
36566 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36573 reference "sec:Index"
36580 \begin_layout Subsection
36584 \begin_layout Standard
36585 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36592 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36599 \begin_layout Subsection
36603 \begin_layout Standard
36604 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36605 Tables are described in section
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36612 reference "sec:Tables"
36616 and in detail in the chapter
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_layout Subsection
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36641 Graphics are described in section
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36648 reference "sec:Graphics"
36655 \begin_layout Subsection
36659 \begin_layout Standard
36660 Inserts a URL as described in section
36661 \begin_inset space ~
36665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36667 reference "sub:URLs"
36674 \begin_layout Subsection
36678 \begin_layout Standard
36679 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36686 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36693 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36698 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36705 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36712 \begin_layout Subsection
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36717 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36724 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36731 \begin_layout Subsection
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36736 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36737 title or caption of a float.
36738 Inserts a short title as described in section
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36745 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36752 \begin_layout Subsection
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36757 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36764 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36771 \begin_layout Subsection
36773 \begin_inset Index idx
36776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36786 Inserts a program listings box.
36787 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36789 Program Code Listings
36794 \begin_inset space ~
36802 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Inserts the actual date.
36808 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36810 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36818 \begin_inset space ~
36826 \begin_layout Subsection
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36831 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36832 \begin_inset space ~
36836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36838 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36845 \begin_layout Section
36847 \begin_inset Index idx
36850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36859 \begin_layout Standard
36860 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36864 of the current document.
36865 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36868 \begin_layout Subsection
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36874 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36875 to jump, for example, between section
36876 \begin_inset space ~
36880 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36881 \begin_inset space ~
36884 2.5 and use the submenu
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36908 \begin_inset space ~
36914 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36918 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36924 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36927 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36931 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36935 \begin_inset space ~
36940 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36943 \begin_inset space ~
36948 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36952 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36955 \begin_layout Standard
36956 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36960 \begin_layout Subsection
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36965 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36966 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36967 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36971 \begin_inset space ~
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36983 \begin_layout Subsection
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36988 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36991 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36993 \begin_inset space ~
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37006 manual for a detailed description.
37009 \begin_layout Section
37011 \begin_inset Index idx
37014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37023 \begin_layout Subsection
37027 \begin_layout Standard
37028 Change Tracking is described in section
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37035 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37042 \begin_layout Subsection
37047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37057 \begin_layout Standard
37058 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37060 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37061 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37062 to the clipboard or update the view.
37063 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37066 \begin_layout Subsection
37067 Start Appendix Here
37070 \begin_layout Standard
37071 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37072 as described in section
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37079 reference "sec:Appendices"
37086 \begin_layout Subsection
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37094 \begin_layout Standard
37095 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37096 default output format for the document (menu
37098 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37099 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37100 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37118 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37122 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37124 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37125 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37130 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37135 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37153 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37157 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37158 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37160 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37161 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37166 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37171 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37181 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37186 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37187 The default output format is
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_layout Subsection
37199 View (Other Formats)
37202 \begin_layout Standard
37203 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37204 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37205 actual document with an external program.
37206 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37207 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37208 All possible formats are listed in section
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37215 reference "sub:Export"
37220 You should at least see the menu entry
37225 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37226 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37227 \begin_inset space ~
37231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37233 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37238 \begin_inset Index idx
37241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 Reconfiguration of LyX
37250 \begin_layout Standard
37251 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37252 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37254 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37255 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37260 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37265 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37275 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37280 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37283 \begin_layout Subsection
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37291 \begin_layout Standard
37292 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37293 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37296 \begin_layout Subsection
37297 Update (Other Formats)
37300 \begin_layout Standard
37301 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37302 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37305 \begin_layout Subsection
37306 View Master Document
37309 \begin_layout Standard
37310 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37331 manual for more information on this topic).
37332 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37333 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37346 generates the output of the whole book, while
37350 will just output the chapter alone.
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37354 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37355 in the document settings (menu
37357 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37358 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37359 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37377 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37381 ) or in the preferences (menu
37383 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37384 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37389 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37394 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37412 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37419 \begin_layout Subsection
37420 Update Master Document
37423 \begin_layout Standard
37424 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37445 manual for more information on this topic).
37446 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37447 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37450 \begin_layout Standard
37451 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37452 in the document settings (menu
37454 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37455 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37456 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37462 \begin_inset space ~
37468 \begin_inset space ~
37472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37474 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37478 ) or in the preferences (menu
37480 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37481 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37483 \begin_inset space ~
37486 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37491 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37509 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37516 \begin_layout Subsection
37520 \begin_layout Standard
37521 Un/compresses the current document.
37524 \begin_layout Subsection
37528 \begin_layout Standard
37529 The document settings are described in appendix
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37536 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37543 \begin_layout Section
37545 \begin_inset Index idx
37548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37557 \begin_layout Subsection
37561 \begin_layout Standard
37562 Spell checking is explained in section
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37569 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37576 \begin_layout Subsection
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37581 The thesaurus is described in section
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37588 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37595 \begin_layout Subsection
37597 \begin_inset Index idx
37600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37607 \begin_inset Index idx
37610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37620 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37621 the highlighted document part.
37624 \begin_layout Subsection
37629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37637 \begin_inset Index idx
37640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37649 \begin_layout Standard
37650 Generates with the help of the program
37654 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37655 This feature is not available on Windows.
37658 \begin_layout Subsection
37663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37671 \begin_inset Index idx
37674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37683 \begin_layout Standard
37684 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37694 to see the full filename paths.
37697 \begin_layout Subsection
37699 \begin_inset Index idx
37702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37711 \begin_layout Standard
37712 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37713 \begin_inset space ~
37717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37719 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37726 \begin_layout Subsection
37728 \begin_inset Index idx
37731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37743 Reconfiguration of LyX
37747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37760 \begin_inset Index idx
37763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37764 Reconfiguration of LyX
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37774 needs; see also section
37775 \begin_inset space ~
37779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37781 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37788 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 \begin_layout Standard
37797 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37798 \begin_inset space ~
37802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37804 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37811 \begin_layout Section
37813 \begin_inset Index idx
37816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37826 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37828 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37832 \begin_layout Standard
37836 \begin_inset space ~
37841 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37842 found by LyX (see also section
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37849 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37856 \begin_layout Standard
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37880 \begin_layout Section
37882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37884 name "sec:Toolbars"
37891 \begin_layout Standard
37892 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37893 \begin_inset space ~
37897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37899 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37908 This is described in the
37910 Additional Features
37915 \begin_layout Subsection
37917 \begin_inset Index idx
37920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 \begin_inset Graphics
37931 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37939 \begin_layout Standard
37940 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 \begin_inset Note Note
37967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37973 manual for more information.
37981 \begin_layout Standard
37982 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37988 \begin_layout Standard
37989 \begin_inset Tabular
37990 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37991 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37992 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37993 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37999 \begin_inset Graphics
38000 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38014 pull-down box for the environments
38027 \begin_layout Standard
38028 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38036 \begin_inset Tabular
38037 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38038 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38039 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38040 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38094 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38140 arg "dialog-show print"
38148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38154 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38170 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38274 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38304 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38334 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38364 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38390 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38404 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38432 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38447 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 Emphasize text, function of the
38477 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38479 \begin_inset space ~
38482 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 Set text to noun style, function of the
38514 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38519 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38537 arg "textstyle-apply"
38545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38549 Format text using the current settings in the
38551 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38556 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38588 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38589 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38591 \begin_inset space ~
38600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38630 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38637 arg "tabular-insert"
38645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38651 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38667 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 Toggle outline window on/off,
38681 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38709 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38724 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38749 \begin_layout Subsection
38751 \begin_inset Index idx
38754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 \begin_layout Standard
38764 \begin_inset Graphics
38765 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38773 \begin_layout Standard
38774 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38780 \begin_layout Standard
38781 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38786 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38792 \begin_layout Standard
38793 \begin_inset Tabular
38794 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38795 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38796 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38797 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38834 arg "layout Enumerate"
38842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38861 arg "layout Itemize"
38869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38915 arg "layout Description"
38923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 arg "depth-increment"
38950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38956 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38980 arg "depth-decrement"
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38994 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38996 \begin_inset space ~
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39018 arg "float-insert figure"
39026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39033 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 arg "float-insert table"
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39063 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39064 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39110 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39204 arg "nomencl-insert"
39212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39218 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39220 \begin_inset space ~
39229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 arg "footnote-insert"
39246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39252 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39268 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39282 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39284 \begin_inset space ~
39293 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39316 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39317 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39330 \begin_inset space ~
39339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39362 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39369 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39392 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39399 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39422 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39457 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39472 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39488 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39502 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39503 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 arg "dialog-show character"
39531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39539 \begin_inset space ~
39542 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39558 arg "layout-paragraph"
39566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39572 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39620 \begin_layout Subsection
39621 View/Update Toolbar
39622 \begin_inset Index idx
39625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39626 Toolbar ! View / Update
39634 \begin_layout Standard
39635 \begin_inset Graphics
39636 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39643 \begin_layout Standard
39644 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39650 \begin_layout Standard
39651 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39655 \begin_layout Standard
39656 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39662 \begin_layout Standard
39663 \begin_inset Tabular
39664 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39665 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39666 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39667 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39691 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39707 arg "buffer-update"
39715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39721 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39737 arg "master-buffer-view"
39745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39751 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39771 arg "master-buffer-update"
39779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39785 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39787 \begin_inset space ~
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39823 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39824 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39825 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39826 Synchronize with Output
39832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39837 \begin_inset Graphics
39838 filename ../images/view-others.png
39840 groupId toolbarbuttons
39851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39857 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39858 View (Other Formats)
39864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39869 \begin_inset Graphics
39870 filename ../images/update-others.png
39872 groupId toolbarbuttons
39881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39887 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39888 Update (Other Formats)
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39906 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39911 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39912 \begin_inset space ~
39916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39918 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39922 , the table toolbar
39923 \begin_inset Index idx
39926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39940 manual and the math macro toolbar
39941 \begin_inset Index idx
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 \begin_layout Chapter
39958 The Document Settings
39959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39961 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39966 \begin_inset Index idx
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39970 Document ! Settings
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39987 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39988 is called with the menu
39990 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39994 You can save your document settings as default with the
39996 Save as Document Defaults
39998 button in any dialog.
39999 This will create a template named
40003 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40007 \begin_layout Standard
40012 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40013 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40016 \begin_layout Standard
40017 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40018 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40019 to find the one you are looking for.
40020 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40021 the submenus of the dialog.
40023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40027 \begin_inset space \space{}
40031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40038 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40039 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40040 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40043 \begin_layout Section
40047 \begin_layout Standard
40048 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40050 Document classes are described in section
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40057 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40065 \begin_layout Standard
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40074 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40078 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40079 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40081 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40090 \begin_layout Standard
40091 Some classes use special class options by default.
40092 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40096 and you can decide to use them or not.
40097 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40098 recommended you leave them untouched.
40103 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40108 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40109 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40115 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40116 \begin_inset Newline newline
40121 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40124 \begin_inset Newline newline
40127 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40135 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40147 \begin_layout Standard
40152 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40153 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40154 document is opened without its master.
40155 This way child documents are always compilable.
40156 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40171 \begin_layout Standard
40172 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40182 \begin_inset Index idx
40185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40192 \begin_inset Index idx
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40196 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40201 for cross-references, see section
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40208 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40215 \begin_layout Section
40219 \begin_layout Standard
40220 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40221 Please refer to the section
40224 \begin_inset space ~
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40237 manual for details.
40240 \begin_layout Section
40244 \begin_layout Standard
40245 Modules are explained in section
40246 \begin_inset space ~
40250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40252 reference "sub:Modules"
40259 \begin_layout Section
40263 \begin_layout Standard
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40271 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40278 \begin_layout Section
40282 \begin_layout Standard
40283 The document font settings are described in section
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40290 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40297 \begin_layout Section
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40319 and whether it should be a
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40327 can also be specified here.
40330 \begin_layout Standard
40331 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40333 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40335 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40338 \begin_layout Section
40342 \begin_layout Standard
40343 This dialog is described in sections
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40350 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40357 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40364 \begin_layout Section
40368 \begin_layout Standard
40369 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40376 reference "sub:Margins"
40383 \begin_layout Section
40385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40387 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40392 \begin_inset Index idx
40395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40396 Language ! Encoding
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40406 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40407 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40408 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40409 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40410 known for a particular character).
40414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40415 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40420 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40425 manual for details.
40433 \begin_layout Standard
40434 If you use the option
40438 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40439 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40440 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40441 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40442 exactly one encoding.
40443 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40446 \begin_layout Standard
40447 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40448 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40449 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40450 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40451 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40452 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40457 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40458 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40459 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40460 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40461 engines to standard LaTeX.
40462 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40463 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40466 \begin_inset space ~
40473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40516 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40521 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40525 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40528 \begin_layout Standard
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40537 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40547 The possible settings are:
40550 \begin_layout Description
40551 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40553 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40554 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40558 \begin_inset space ~
40562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40564 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40571 \begin_layout Description
40572 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40573 format you will use.
40574 In many cases this will be
40579 \begin_inset Index idx
40582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40583 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40589 If the newer package
40594 \begin_inset Index idx
40597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40598 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40603 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40604 this package will be used instead of
40611 \begin_layout Description
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40624 would be more appropriate.
40627 \begin_layout Description
40628 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40629 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40633 (for German texts), type in
40636 \begin_inset Newline newline
40641 usepackage{ngerman}
40644 \begin_layout Description
40645 None will not use a language package.
40646 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40649 \begin_layout Standard
40650 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40653 \begin_layout Description
40655 \begin_inset space ~
40659 \begin_inset space ~
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40670 , but the LaTeX-package
40675 \begin_inset Index idx
40678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40679 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40685 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40686 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40687 languages in TeX code.
40690 \begin_layout Description
40691 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40692 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40693 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40696 \begin_layout Description
40698 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40705 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40708 \begin_layout Description
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40717 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40720 \begin_layout Description
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40725 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40728 \begin_layout Description
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40737 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40738 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40741 \begin_layout Description
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset space ~
40750 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40754 \begin_layout Description
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40763 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40764 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40767 \begin_layout Description
40769 \begin_inset space ~
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40780 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40781 \begin_inset space ~
40787 \begin_layout Description
40789 \begin_inset space ~
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40800 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40801 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40804 \begin_layout Description
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40813 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40814 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40815 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40816 \begin_inset space ~
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40826 \begin_layout Description
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40835 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40836 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40837 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40838 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40849 \begin_layout Description
40851 \begin_inset space ~
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40858 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40861 \begin_layout Description
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40873 \begin_layout Description
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40882 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40885 \begin_layout Description
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40890 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40893 \begin_layout Description
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40898 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40901 \begin_layout Description
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40910 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40913 \begin_layout Description
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40925 \begin_layout Description
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40934 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40937 \begin_layout Description
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40949 \begin_layout Description
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40958 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40963 \begin_inset Index idx
40966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40967 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40972 , when using this, set the document language to
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40986 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40990 , when using this, set the document language to
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_layout Description
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41008 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41013 \begin_inset Index idx
41016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41017 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41022 , when using this, set the document language to
41027 \begin_layout Description
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41036 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41040 , when using this, set the document language to
41045 \begin_layout Description
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41054 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41058 , when using this, set the document language to
41063 \begin_layout Description
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41068 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41071 \begin_layout Description
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41084 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41087 \begin_layout Description
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41100 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41101 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41102 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41105 \begin_layout Description
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41117 \begin_layout Description
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41126 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41127 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41130 \begin_layout Description
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41139 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41144 \begin_inset Index idx
41147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41148 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41153 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41156 \begin_layout Description
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41165 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41173 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41178 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41180 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41183 \begin_layout Description
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41192 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41197 \begin_inset Index idx
41200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41201 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41206 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41209 \begin_layout Description
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41214 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41219 \begin_inset Index idx
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41223 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41229 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41233 \begin_layout Description
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41246 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_layout Description
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41266 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41267 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41268 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41272 \begin_layout Description
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41285 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41286 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41289 \begin_layout Section
41291 \begin_inset Index idx
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41301 \begin_inset Index idx
41304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41311 \begin_inset Index idx
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 Color ! Shaded boxes
41321 \begin_inset Index idx
41324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41325 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41333 \begin_layout Standard
41334 Here you can alter the font color for the
41338 (default: black), for
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41346 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41350 (default: white) and for
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41363 sets the color back to the default.
41366 \begin_layout Standard
41367 Clicking any button showing
41375 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41376 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41377 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41378 later more quickly.
41381 \begin_layout Standard
41382 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41386 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41391 out note appears blue in the output.)
41399 \begin_layout Standard
41400 Note, if you change the
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41408 font color and use the option
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41416 in the document settings under
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41424 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41431 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41438 \begin_layout Standard
41439 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41445 \begin_layout Standard
41449 \begin_inset space ~
41458 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41463 Code after a forced page break:
41466 \begin_layout Itemize
41467 For the page color:
41468 \begin_inset Newline newline
41475 pagecolor{color name}
41478 \begin_layout Itemize
41479 For the text color:
41480 \begin_inset Newline newline
41490 \begin_layout Standard
41491 You are restricted to one of
41527 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41540 \begin_inset Newline newline
41543 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41544 names to refer to them:
41547 \begin_layout Itemize
41553 \begin_inset Newline newline
41558 page_backgroundcolor
41561 \begin_layout Itemize
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset Newline newline
41579 \begin_layout Itemize
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41589 \begin_inset Newline newline
41597 \begin_layout Itemize
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41607 \begin_inset Newline newline
41615 \begin_layout Standard
41616 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41620 Cells of the Embedded
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41627 \begin_layout Section
41631 \begin_layout Standard
41632 Here you can adjust the
41636 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41640 as described in section
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41647 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41654 \begin_layout Section
41658 \begin_layout Standard
41659 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41664 \begin_inset Index idx
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41668 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41678 \begin_inset Index idx
41681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41682 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41690 Sectioned bibliography
41692 using the LaTeX package
41697 \begin_inset Index idx
41700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41701 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41706 and you can select a
41710 for the generation of the bibliography.
41711 For a further description see section
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41718 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41725 \begin_layout Section
41729 \begin_layout Standard
41730 Here you can define the
41734 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41742 reference "sec:Index"
41749 \begin_layout Section
41753 \begin_layout Standard
41754 The PDF properties are explained in section
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41761 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41768 \begin_layout Section
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41773 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41778 \begin_inset Index idx
41781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41782 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41792 \begin_inset Index idx
41795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41796 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41806 \begin_inset Index idx
41809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41810 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41820 \begin_inset Index idx
41823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41829 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41832 \begin_layout Description
41833 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41834 ensure that you have enabled
41837 \begin_inset space ~
41845 \begin_layout Description
41846 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41861 \begin_layout Description
41862 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41873 \begin_layout Description
41874 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41876 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41885 \begin_layout Section
41889 \begin_layout Standard
41890 The float placement options are described in the section
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41909 \begin_layout Section
41913 \begin_layout Standard
41914 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41916 Program Code Listings
41921 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_layout Section
41933 \begin_layout Standard
41934 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41942 set to be used and set the
41947 The itemize environment is described in section
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41954 reference "sec:Itemize"
41961 \begin_layout Standard
41962 You can furthermore specify a
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41970 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41971 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41978 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41984 \begin_inset space \space{}
41988 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41998 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41999 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42002 \begin_layout Standard
42003 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42014 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42015 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42017 \begin_inset space ~
42023 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42027 usepackage{textcomp}
42030 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42034 usepackage{amssymb}
42044 \begin_layout Section
42048 \begin_layout Standard
42049 Branches are described in section
42050 \begin_inset space ~
42054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42056 reference "sec:Branches"
42063 \begin_layout Section
42065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42067 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42074 \begin_layout Standard
42075 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42078 \begin_layout Description
42080 \begin_inset space ~
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42087 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42107 View Master Document
42108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42115 Update Master Document
42116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42123 menu or the toolbar.
42124 The default is set in
42126 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42127 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42132 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42142 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42149 \begin_layout Description
42151 \begin_inset space ~
42155 \begin_inset space ~
42158 Output settings for the menu
42160 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42168 For a detailed description see section
42170 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42183 \begin_layout Description
42185 \begin_inset space ~
42189 \begin_inset space ~
42192 Options offers settings for the export format
42198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42216 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42217 \begin_inset space ~
42220 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42229 settings are described in detail in section
42231 Math Output in XHTML
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42254 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42257 \begin_layout Section
42262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42273 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42274 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42275 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42276 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42281 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42288 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42295 \begin_layout Chapter
42301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42303 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42308 \begin_inset Index idx
42311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42320 \begin_layout Standard
42321 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42323 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42327 It has the following submenus.
42330 \begin_layout Section
42334 \begin_layout Subsection
42338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42339 User Interface File
42340 \begin_inset Index idx
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 Customization ! of toolbars
42350 \begin_inset Index idx
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 Customization ! of menus
42362 \begin_layout Standard
42363 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42364 interface (ui) file.
42365 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42373 \begin_layout Description
42378 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42381 \begin_layout Description
42388 the menu entries in popup context menus
42391 \begin_layout Description
42396 specifies the toolbar buttons
42399 \begin_layout Standard
42400 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42401 and edit the entries.
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42405 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42417 entries must be finished with an explicit
42442 and in the case of the
42443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42455 The syntax for the entries is:
42458 \begin_layout Standard
42459 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42487 \begin_layout Standard
42489 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42492 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42494 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42515 \begin_layout Standard
42516 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42522 \begin_layout Standard
42523 For example, assuming you use the menu
42525 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42528 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42532 \begin_layout Standard
42533 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42557 \begin_layout Standard
42559 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42574 to have the sixth bookmark.
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42581 \begin_inset space ~
42586 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42587 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42591 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42602 \begin_layout Standard
42605 Enable tool tips in main work area
42607 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42615 \begin_layout Standard
42618 Restore window layouts and geometries
42620 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42621 in the last LyX session.
42624 \begin_layout Standard
42627 Restore cursor positions
42629 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42633 \begin_layout Standard
42636 Load opened files from last session
42638 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42644 Clear all session information
42646 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42647 of last opened documents, etc.).
42650 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42654 name "sub:Backup documents"
42659 \begin_inset Index idx
42662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42674 Backup original documents when saving
42676 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42677 it was saved the last time.
42678 It is stored in the
42681 \begin_inset space ~
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42693 reference "sec:Paths"
42697 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42706 The backup file has the file extension
42707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42721 \begin_layout Standard
42724 Backup documents, every
42726 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42732 Save documents compressed by default
42734 always saves files in a compressed format.
42737 \begin_layout Standard
42742 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42745 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42747 \begin_inset space ~
42755 \begin_layout Standard
42758 Open documents in tabs
42760 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42763 \begin_layout Standard
42768 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42780 reference "sec:Paths"
42784 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42790 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42792 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42798 Single close-tab button
42800 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42803 \begin_inset Graphics
42804 filename ../images/closetab.png
42811 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42812 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42824 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42832 \begin_layout Subsection
42834 \begin_inset Index idx
42837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42846 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42853 \begin_layout Standard
42854 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42858 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42866 This section only deals with the fonts
42871 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42874 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42875 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42886 \begin_layout Standard
42887 By default, LyX uses
42903 (depends on the system) as its
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 You can change the font size with the
42930 \begin_layout Standard
42935 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42940 points have the size of 1
42941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42945 \begin_inset space ~
42949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42951 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42956 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42961 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42968 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42975 \begin_layout Standard
42978 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42980 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42981 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42982 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42983 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42985 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42986 \begin_inset space ~
42992 \begin_layout Subsection
42994 \begin_inset Index idx
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43004 \begin_inset Index idx
43007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 \begin_layout Standard
43017 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43018 the list and selecting the
43025 \begin_layout Standard
43026 By checking the option
43030 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43033 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43034 \begin_inset space ~
43038 \begin_inset space ~
43043 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43046 \begin_layout Subsection
43048 \begin_inset Index idx
43051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43061 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43069 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43070 This feature is described in section
43071 \begin_inset space ~
43075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43077 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Checking the option
43088 \begin_inset space ~
43092 \begin_inset space ~
43096 \begin_inset space ~
43101 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43104 \begin_layout Section
43106 \begin_inset Index idx
43109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43118 \begin_layout Subsection
43122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43126 \begin_layout Standard
43129 Cursor follows scrollbar
43131 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43135 \begin_layout Standard
43136 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43137 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43138 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43144 Scroll below end of document
43146 is self-explanatory.
43149 \begin_layout Standard
43150 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43157 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43159 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43160 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43163 \begin_layout Standard
43166 Sort environments alphabetically
43168 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43171 \begin_layout Standard
43174 Group environments by their category
43176 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43179 \begin_layout Standard
43184 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43199 \begin_layout Standard
43200 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43205 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43206 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43210 \begin_layout Subsection
43212 \begin_inset Index idx
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43222 \begin_inset Index idx
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 Settings ! Shortcuts
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43239 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43240 Several binding files are available, among them:
43243 \begin_layout Description
43244 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43247 \begin_layout Description
43248 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43260 \begin_layout Description
43261 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43272 \begin_layout Standard
43273 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43278 , and binding files for special languages.
43279 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43284 \begin_inset space \space{}
43288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43296 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43300 \begin_layout Standard
43301 Some binding files, like
43305 , only have a limited scope.
43306 When looking at the end of the file
43310 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43313 \begin_layout Standard
43317 \begin_inset space ~
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43326 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43327 in the selected key binding file.
43330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43334 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43339 \begin_inset Index idx
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43343 Key Bindings ! Editing
43351 \begin_layout Standard
43352 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43353 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43354 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43357 Show key-bindings containing
43360 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43361 Insert there for example as keyword
43362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43369 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43370 functions that contain
43371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43379 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43380 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43384 that you will find in the
43391 \begin_layout Standard
43392 For example, to add the shortcut
43400 , select the function and press the
43405 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43406 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43409 \begin_layout Standard
43410 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43411 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43412 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43413 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43414 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43419 \begin_layout Standard
43420 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43423 \begin_layout Standard
43424 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43426 The syntax of the entries is:
43429 \begin_layout Standard
43435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43453 \begin_layout Subsection
43455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43457 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43462 \begin_inset Index idx
43465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43472 \begin_inset Index idx
43475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43476 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43484 \begin_layout Standard
43485 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43486 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43487 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43488 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43500 and select the keyboard map file named
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43516 keyboard map and, if you use the
43520 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43523 arg "keymap-primary"
43529 arg "keymap-secondary"
43532 respectively or toggle between them with
43535 arg "keymap-toggle"
43541 \begin_layout Standard
43542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43550 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43559 \begin_layout Standard
43560 You can also specify the mouse
43562 Wheel scrolling speed
43565 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43569 \begin_layout Standard
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43586 you can select a key for zooming.
43587 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43590 \begin_layout Subsection
43594 \begin_layout Standard
43595 Input completion is described in section
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43602 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43609 \begin_layout Section
43611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43618 \begin_inset Index idx
43621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 \begin_inset Index idx
43631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43640 \begin_layout Standard
43641 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43643 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43646 \begin_layout Description
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43651 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43652 It is the default when you
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43671 \begin_layout Description
43673 \begin_inset space ~
43676 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43678 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_layout Description
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43697 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43703 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43707 \begin_inset Newline newline
43711 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43723 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43731 \begin_layout Description
43733 \begin_inset space ~
43737 \begin_inset Index idx
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43746 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43747 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43754 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43762 will be used to save the backups.
43763 \begin_inset Newline newline
43766 Backup files have the ending
43767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43777 \begin_layout Description
43782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43793 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43794 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43795 \begin_inset Newline newline
43802 You add a BibTeX-database
43807 You can edit this file with the program
43816 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43825 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43830 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43831 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43837 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43838 \begin_inset Newline newline
43841 The pipe is also used for the
43846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43852 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43857 \begin_inset Newline newline
43860 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43861 \begin_inset Newline newline
43877 \begin_layout Description
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43882 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43885 \begin_layout Description
43887 \begin_inset space ~
43890 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43891 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43892 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43895 \begin_layout Description
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43900 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43906 You only need to specify it if you are using
43910 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43916 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43920 \begin_layout Description
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43925 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43926 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43927 where to find it on the system.
43928 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43929 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43938 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43939 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43942 \begin_layout Description
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43947 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43948 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43950 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43952 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43953 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43954 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43955 scanned for the input files.
43956 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43957 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43958 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43959 compilation may fail for some documents.
43962 \begin_layout Section
43966 \begin_layout Standard
43967 Here you can insert your
43976 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43984 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43988 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43991 \begin_layout Section
43993 \begin_inset Index idx
43996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43997 Language ! Settings
44003 \begin_inset Index idx
44006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44007 Settings ! Language
44015 \begin_layout Subsection
44017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44019 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44026 \begin_layout Description
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44032 \begin_inset space ~
44035 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44036 You can find its actual translation status here:
44037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44039 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44046 \begin_layout Description
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44051 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44053 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44054 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44071 The most widespread language package is
44076 \begin_inset Index idx
44079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44080 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44085 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44086 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44087 alternative language package
44092 \begin_inset Index idx
44095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44096 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44101 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44102 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44108 The available selections are described in section
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44115 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44122 \begin_layout Description
44124 \begin_inset space ~
44127 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44128 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44129 An example is the start command
44135 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44155 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44160 \begin_layout Description
44162 \begin_inset space ~
44170 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44171 command toggles the package on and off.
44174 \begin_layout Description
44176 \begin_inset space ~
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44183 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44187 \begin_layout Description
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44196 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44197 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44198 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44199 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44206 \begin_layout Description
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44211 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44213 When this option is not set, the
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44221 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44222 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44233 \begin_layout Description
44235 \begin_inset space ~
44241 \begin_inset space ~
44247 When it is not set, the
44250 \begin_inset space ~
44255 is set to the end of the document.
44258 \begin_layout Description
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44267 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44268 language will be underlined in blue.
44271 \begin_layout Description
44273 \begin_inset space ~
44277 \begin_inset space ~
44280 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44281 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44284 \begin_layout Description
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44289 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44290 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44291 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44292 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44295 \begin_layout Subsection
44299 \begin_layout Standard
44300 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44301 \begin_inset space ~
44305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44307 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44314 \begin_layout Section
44318 \begin_layout Subsection
44322 \begin_layout Description
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44331 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44334 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44335 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44343 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44346 \begin_layout Description
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44352 \begin_inset Index idx
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44362 \begin_inset Index idx
44365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44366 Settings ! Date format
44371 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44372 \begin_inset Newline newline
44376 \begin_inset Flex URL
44379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44381 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44387 \begin_inset Newline newline
44390 For example the format
44391 \begin_inset Newline newline
44395 \begin_inset Newline newline
44398 prints the date as day/month/year.
44401 \begin_layout Description
44403 \begin_inset space ~
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44410 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44413 \begin_layout Description
44415 \begin_inset space ~
44418 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44420 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44422 \begin_inset space ~
44428 For a detailed description see section
44430 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44435 \begin_inset space ~
44443 \begin_layout Subsection
44445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44452 \begin_inset Index idx
44455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44462 \begin_inset Index idx
44465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44474 \begin_layout Description
44476 \begin_inset space ~
44479 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44484 The name will be used when the
44489 \begin_inset Newline newline
44493 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44501 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44509 \begin_layout Description
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44514 command is the command LyX
44515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44522 LaTeX uses for printing.
44530 \begin_layout Description
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44539 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44540 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44541 of the program that provides the
44548 \begin_layout Description
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44554 \begin_inset space ~
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44561 printer This option works only for the
44566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44578 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44579 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44582 \begin_layout Subsection
44587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44597 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44602 \begin_inset Index idx
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44614 \begin_layout Description
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44631 \begin_inset space ~
44635 \begin_inset space ~
44638 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44643 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44664 are used for Cyrillic.
44665 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44678 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44679 LyX sets up in the background.
44680 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44683 \begin_layout Description
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44692 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44697 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44700 \begin_layout Description
44702 \begin_inset space ~
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44710 \begin_inset space ~
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44717 options They only have an effect when the program
44721 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44724 \begin_layout Standard
44725 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44726 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44727 manuals of the applications.
44730 \begin_layout Description
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44735 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44742 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44749 \begin_layout Description
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44754 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44761 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44768 \begin_layout Description
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44773 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44774 \begin_inset space ~
44778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44780 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44787 \begin_layout Description
44792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44803 command Command for the program
44807 that is described in the section
44813 Additional Features
44818 \begin_layout Standard
44819 There are additionally the following options:
44822 \begin_layout Description
44824 \begin_inset space ~
44828 \begin_inset space ~
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44843 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44861 to separate folders.
44862 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44863 \begin_inset Index idx
44866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44873 \begin_inset Index idx
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44885 \begin_layout Description
44887 \begin_inset space ~
44891 \begin_inset space ~
44895 \begin_inset space ~
44899 \begin_inset space ~
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44907 \begin_inset space ~
44910 changes Removes all manually set
44916 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44917 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44919 \begin_inset space ~
44924 dialog when changing the document class.
44927 \begin_layout Section
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44933 \begin_inset Index idx
44936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 \begin_layout Subsection
44947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44949 name "sub:Converters"
44954 \begin_inset Index idx
44957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44966 \begin_layout Standard
44967 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44968 from one format to another.
44969 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44970 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44977 \begin_inset space ~
44982 field and press the
44987 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44991 \begin_inset space ~
44996 drop-down list, modify the
45000 field and press the
45007 \begin_layout Standard
45010 Converter File Cache
45016 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45018 Maximum Age (in days
45021 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45022 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45025 \begin_layout Standard
45026 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45027 definition, is described in the section
45038 \begin_layout Subsection
45040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45042 name "sec:File-Formats"
45047 \begin_inset Index idx
45050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45057 \begin_inset Index idx
45060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 \begin_layout Standard
45070 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45079 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45082 \begin_layout Standard
45083 You can also define the
45085 Default output format
45087 that is used when you use
45089 View, Update, View Master Document
45093 Update Master Document
45099 menu or the toolbar.
45102 \begin_layout Standard
45103 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45114 \begin_layout Standard
45115 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45116 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45117 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45118 This is done by specifying a
45123 More about this is described in the section
45134 \begin_layout Chapter
45135 Units available in LyX
45136 \begin_inset Index idx
45139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45148 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45155 \begin_layout Standard
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45163 reference "tab:Units"
45167 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45170 \begin_layout Standard
45171 \begin_inset Float table
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45178 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45196 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 \begin_inset Tabular
45205 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45206 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 scaled point (65536
45360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45420 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45475 % of original image width
45482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45689 \begin_layout Chapter
45691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45693 name "chap:Credits"
45700 \begin_layout Standard
45701 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45702 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45705 \begin_layout Itemize
45708 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45711 \begin_layout Itemize
45717 \begin_layout Itemize
45723 \begin_layout Itemize
45729 \begin_layout Itemize
45735 \begin_layout Itemize
45741 \begin_layout Itemize
45747 \begin_layout Itemize
45753 \begin_layout Itemize
45756 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45759 \begin_layout Itemize
45765 \begin_layout Itemize
45771 \begin_layout Itemize
45777 \begin_layout Itemize
45783 \begin_layout Itemize
45789 \begin_layout Itemize
45795 \begin_layout Itemize
45801 \begin_layout Itemize
45807 \begin_layout Itemize
45809 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45818 \begin_layout Standard
45819 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45822 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45829 \begin_layout Bibliography
45830 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45831 LatexCommand bibitem
45838 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45841 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45846 \begin_inset Newline newline
45850 \begin_inset Flex URL
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45855 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45863 \begin_layout Bibliography
45864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45865 LatexCommand bibitem
45866 key "latexcompanion"
45870 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45872 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45875 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45878 \begin_layout Bibliography
45879 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45880 LatexCommand bibitem
45885 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45888 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45891 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45894 \begin_layout Bibliography
45895 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45896 LatexCommand bibitem
45903 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45906 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45909 \begin_layout Bibliography
45910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45911 LatexCommand bibitem
45923 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45926 \begin_layout Bibliography
45927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45928 LatexCommand bibitem
45934 \begin_inset Newline newline
45938 \begin_inset Flex URL
45941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45951 \begin_layout Bibliography
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45953 LatexCommand bibitem
45959 \begin_inset Newline newline
45963 \begin_inset Flex URL
45966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45976 \begin_layout Bibliography
45977 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45978 LatexCommand bibitem
45984 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45986 name "Documentation"
45987 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45996 \begin_inset Newline newline
46000 \begin_inset Flex URL
46003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46005 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46013 \begin_layout Bibliography
46014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46015 LatexCommand bibitem
46021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46023 name "Documentation"
46024 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46028 how to use the program
46033 \begin_inset Newline newline
46037 \begin_inset Flex URL
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46042 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46050 \begin_layout Bibliography
46051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46052 LatexCommand bibitem
46058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46060 name "Documentation"
46061 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46070 \begin_inset Newline newline
46074 \begin_inset Flex URL
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46087 \begin_layout Bibliography
46088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46089 LatexCommand bibitem
46095 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46097 name "Documentation"
46098 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46107 \begin_inset Newline newline
46111 \begin_inset Flex URL
46114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46124 \begin_layout Bibliography
46125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46126 LatexCommand bibitem
46132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46134 name "Documentation"
46135 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46139 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46140 \begin_inset Newline newline
46144 \begin_inset Flex URL
46147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46157 \begin_layout Bibliography
46158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46159 LatexCommand bibitem
46165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46167 name "Documentation"
46168 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46172 of the LaTeX-package
46177 \begin_inset Index idx
46180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46181 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46187 \begin_inset Newline newline
46191 \begin_inset Flex URL
46194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46204 \begin_layout Bibliography
46205 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46206 LatexCommand bibitem
46212 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46214 name "Documentation"
46215 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46219 of the LaTeX-package
46224 \begin_inset Index idx
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46228 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46234 \begin_inset Newline newline
46238 \begin_inset Flex URL
46241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46243 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46251 \begin_layout Bibliography
46252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46253 LatexCommand bibitem
46259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46261 name "Documentation"
46262 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46266 of the LaTeX-package
46271 \begin_inset Index idx
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46281 \begin_inset Newline newline
46285 \begin_inset Flex URL
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46290 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46298 \begin_layout Bibliography
46299 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46300 LatexCommand bibitem
46306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46308 name "Documentation"
46309 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46313 of the LaTeX-package
46318 \begin_inset Index idx
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46322 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46328 \begin_inset Newline newline
46332 \begin_inset Flex URL
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46345 \begin_layout Bibliography
46346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46347 LatexCommand bibitem
46353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46355 name "Documentation"
46356 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46360 of the LaTeX-package
46365 \begin_inset Index idx
46368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46375 \begin_inset Newline newline
46379 \begin_inset Flex URL
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46384 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46392 \begin_layout Bibliography
46393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46394 LatexCommand bibitem
46400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46402 name "Documentation"
46403 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46407 of the LaTeX-package
46412 \begin_inset Index idx
46415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46416 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46422 \begin_inset Newline newline
46426 \begin_inset Flex URL
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46431 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46439 \begin_layout Bibliography
46440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46441 LatexCommand bibitem
46447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46449 name "Documentation"
46450 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46454 of the LaTeX-package
46459 \begin_inset Index idx
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46463 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46469 \begin_inset Newline newline
46473 \begin_inset Flex URL
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46486 \begin_layout Bibliography
46487 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46488 LatexCommand bibitem
46494 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46497 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46501 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46502 \begin_inset Newline newline
46506 \begin_inset Flex URL
46509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46511 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46519 \begin_layout Bibliography
46520 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46521 LatexCommand bibitem
46527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46530 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46534 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46535 \begin_inset Newline newline
46539 \begin_inset Flex URL
46542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46544 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46552 \begin_layout Bibliography
46553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46554 LatexCommand bibitem
46560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46563 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46567 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46568 \begin_inset Newline newline
46572 \begin_inset Flex URL
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46577 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46585 \begin_layout Bibliography
46586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46587 LatexCommand bibitem
46593 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46596 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46600 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46601 \begin_inset Newline newline
46605 \begin_inset Flex URL
46608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46610 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46618 \begin_layout Bibliography
46619 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46620 LatexCommand bibitem
46626 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46629 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46633 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46634 \begin_inset Newline newline
46638 \begin_inset Flex URL
46641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46643 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46651 \begin_layout Bibliography
46652 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46653 LatexCommand bibitem
46659 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46662 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46666 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46667 \begin_inset Newline newline
46671 \begin_inset Flex URL
46674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46676 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46684 \begin_layout Bibliography
46685 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46686 LatexCommand bibitem
46692 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46695 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46699 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46700 \begin_inset Newline newline
46704 \begin_inset Flex URL
46707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46709 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46717 \begin_layout Bibliography
46718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46719 LatexCommand bibitem
46725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46728 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46732 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46733 \begin_inset Newline newline
46737 \begin_inset Flex URL
46740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46742 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46750 \begin_layout Bibliography
46751 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46752 LatexCommand bibitem
46758 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46761 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46765 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46766 \begin_inset Newline newline
46770 \begin_inset Flex URL
46773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46775 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46783 \begin_layout Bibliography
46784 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46785 LatexCommand bibitem
46791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46794 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46798 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46799 \begin_inset Newline newline
46803 \begin_inset Flex URL
46806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46808 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46816 \begin_layout Bibliography
46817 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46818 LatexCommand bibitem
46824 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46827 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46831 about new features in
46836 \begin_inset Newline newline
46840 \begin_inset Flex URL
46843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46845 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46853 \begin_layout Standard
46854 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46888 \begin_inset Note Note
46891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46899 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46900 bibliography is the second one:
46908 \begin_layout Standard
46909 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46910 LatexCommand bibtex
46911 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46912 options "biblio/alphadin"
46919 \begin_layout Standard
46920 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46923 \begin_layout Standard
46924 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46925 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46931 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46932 LatexCommand printindex